Universe

BusinessObjects XI 3.
0: Universe Design
Learners Guide DM310V3.0

Revision A, August 2008
Copyright
2008 Business Objects. All rights reserved. Business Objects owns the following U.S. patents, which may cover products that are offered and licensed by Business Objects: 5,295,243; 5,339,390; 5,555,403; 5,590,250; 5,619,632; 5,632,009; 5,857,205; 5,880,742; 5,883,635; 6,085,202; 6,108,698; 6,247,008; 6,289,352; 6,300,957; 6,377,259; 6,490,593; 6,578,027; 6,581,068; 6,628,312; 6,654,761; 6,768,986; 6,772,409; 6,831,668; 6,882,998; 6,892,189; 6,901,555; 7,089,238; 7,107,266; 7,139,766; 7,178,099; 7,181,435; 7,181,440; 7,194,465; 7,222,130; 7,299,419; 7,320,122 and 7,356,779. Business Objects and the Business Objects logo, BusinessObjects, Business Objects Crystal Vision, Business Process On Demand, BusinessQuery, Cartesis, Crystal Analysis, Crystal Applications, Crystal Decisions, Crystal Enterprise, Crystal Insider, Crystal Reports, Crystal Vision, Desktop Intelligence, Inxight, the Inxight Logo, LinguistX, Star Tree, Table Lens, ThingFinder, Timewall, Let There Be Light, Metify, NSite, Rapid Marts, RapidMarts, the Spectrum Design, Web Intelligence, Workmail and Xcelsius are trademarks or registered trademarks in the United States and/or other countries of Business Objects and/or affiliated companies. Business Objects is an SAP company. SAP is the trademark or registered trademark of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries. All other names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
C O N T E N T S
About this Course
Course introduction..................................................................................................xvii Course description...................................................................................................xviii Course audience.......................................................................................................xviii Prerequisites..............................................................................................................xviii Level, delivery, and duration...................................................................................xix Applicable certifications and designations.............................................................xix Course success factors................................................................................................xix Course setup................................................................................................................xix Course materials.........................................................................................................xix Learning process..........................................................................................................xx
Lesson 1
Understanding BusinessObjects Universes

Lesson introduction.......................................................................................................1 Defining BusinessObjects universe concepts.............................................................2 What is a universe?................................................................................................2 The semantic layer.................................................................................................3 What type of database schema is used?..............................................................4 Classes and objects ................................................................................................5 Advantages of a universe .....................................................................................6 BusinessObjects Universe Designer components .............................................6 Starting Universe Designer ..................................................................................7 Using the Quick Design Wizard..........................................................................8 Using Universe Designer module commands ..................................................9 Saving and exporting a universe.......................................................................12 Importing a universe ..........................................................................................12 Universe file names as identifiers .....................................................................13 Saving a universe definition as PDF .................................................................13 Giving all users access to a universe ................................................................14 Activity: Viewing a universe in Universe Designer........................................14 Using the universe development cycle.....................................................................16 The universe development cycle process ........................................................16 Preparation phase ................................................................................................17 Analysis phase......................................................................................................18 Planning phase.....................................................................................................20 Implementation phase.........................................................................................21
Table of ContentsLearners Guide
iii
Implementation phase 1: schema design..........................................................21 Implementation phase 2: building the universe..............................................24 Testing phase........................................................................................................24 Deployment phase...............................................................................................25 Updating/maintenance.......................................................................................26 Prepackaged solutions.........................................................................................27 Activity: Planning a universe.............................................................................27 Quiz: Understanding BusinessObjects universes...................................................29 Lesson summary..........................................................................................................30
Lesson 2
Creating the Course Universe

Lesson introduction.....................................................................................................31 Describing the course database and universe ........................................................32 The course database.............................................................................................32 Creating the universe .................................................................................................35 Setting the database connection.........................................................................35 Data access drivers...............................................................................................35 ODBC connection drivers...................................................................................36 More about connection types.............................................................................39 Viewing, modifying, and deleting available connections..............................39 Creating a new universe......................................................................................41 Defining universe parameters ...........................................................................42 Identifying the universe......................................................................................42 Universe parameters............................................................................................43 Definition tab........................................................................................................45 Summary tab.........................................................................................................46 Strategies tab.........................................................................................................47 Controls tab...........................................................................................................48 SQL tab...................................................................................................................49 Links tab................................................................................................................50 Parameters tab......................................................................................................50 Activity: Creating a new universe and defining its connection....................51 Quiz: Creating the course universe...........................................................................52 Lesson summary..........................................................................................................53
Lesson 3
Building the Universe Structure

Lesson introduction.....................................................................................................55 Populating the universe structure.............................................................................56 Designing a schema ............................................................................................56 Schema design and the universe creation process..........................................56 Adding tables .......................................................................................................56 Manipulating tables in the universe structure.................................................59
iv
Universe DesignLearners Guide
Activity: Populating the universe structure.....................................................62 Defining joins in a universe........................................................................................64 About joins and SQL WHERE clauses .............................................................64 Creating joins........................................................................................................65 About join properties...........................................................................................67 Editing the join expression .................................................................................68 Using the Join SQL editor ..................................................................................68 Detecting joins .....................................................................................................70 Setting join cardinalities......................................................................................70 About cardinality.................................................................................................70 Setting cardinality manually or with the automatic detection tool..............71 Displaying cardinalities ......................................................................................73 Detecting cardinality automatically..................................................................75 How is cardinality detected?..............................................................................75 Detect cardinality for all joins.............................................................................76 Best practices for setting join cardinality .........................................................77 Join types ..............................................................................................................78 Equi-joins ..............................................................................................................78 Outer joins ............................................................................................................79 Theta joins.............................................................................................................81 Shortcut joins........................................................................................................82 Self-restricting joins .............................................................................................83 List Mode...............................................................................................................85 Checking integrity ...............................................................................................86 Activity: Defining joins in a universe................................................................87 Quiz: Building the universe structure......................................................................89 Lesson summary..........................................................................................................90
Lesson 4
Creating Dimension Objects

Lesson introduction.....................................................................................................91 Describing classes and objects ..................................................................................92 Classes....................................................................................................................92 Objects....................................................................................................................93 Creating classes and objects ......................................................................................95 Creating classes....................................................................................................95 Automatically creating classes and objects from a table ...............................97 Defining a new object as a detail object............................................................98 Working with classes and subclasses................................................................99 Editing the object properties...............................................................................99 Edit Properties: Properties................................................................................102 Edit Properties: Advanced................................................................................103 Edit Properties: Keys..........................................................................................104 Edit Properties: Source Information................................................................104 Copying and pasting objects.............................................................................105
Find and replace ................................................................................................106 Checking object integrity .................................................................................108 Viewing parent tables........................................................................................109 Testing objects ....................................................................................................110 Activity: Creating and testing classes and objects.........................................110 Quiz: Creating dimension objects...........................................................................116 Lesson summary........................................................................................................117
Lesson 5
Creating Measure Objects

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................119 Defining measure object concepts...........................................................................120 Measure objects concepts..................................................................................120 How a measure object infers SQL ...................................................................120 The query process .............................................................................................122 Aggregation at SELECT level...........................................................................123 Aggregation at projection level........................................................................123 Setting selection and projection aggregates...................................................124 Creating measure objects..........................................................................................125 Measure objects .................................................................................................125 Testing measure objects.....................................................................................126 Activity: Creating and testing measure objects.............................................127 Creating delegated measure objects........................................................................130 What is a delegated measure?..........................................................................130 How does the delegated measure work?........................................................131 Using a delegated measure as a weighted average.......................................131 Best practices for using delegated measures..................................................133 When are delegated measures inappropriate?..............................................134 Activity: Creating and using a delegated measure ......................................134 Quiz: Creating measure objects...............................................................................137 Lesson summary........................................................................................................138
Lesson 6
Resolving Loops in a Universe

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................139 Understanding loops ................................................................................................140 Problems caused by loops ................................................................................140 Loops in a universe schema and not in the database ...................................140 Recognizing loops..............................................................................................141 What is the loop doing?.....................................................................................141 Resolving loops ..................................................................................................142 Resolving loops using aliases ..................................................................................143 About aliases ......................................................................................................143 Detecting loops and inserting aliases .............................................................143
vi
Redefining objects .............................................................................................146 Listing and renaming aliases ...........................................................................147 Choosing which alias method to use ..............................................................147 Resolving self-referencing join loops using aliases.......................................147 Activity: Using aliases to resolve loops...........................................................149 Resolving loops using contexts ...............................................................................152 About contexts....................................................................................................152 Detecting and creating contexts ......................................................................155 Creating objects for each context ....................................................................158 Editing a context ................................................................................................158 Testing contexts .................................................................................................159 Updating contexts .............................................................................................161 Loops and shortcut joins...................................................................................162 Activity: Using contexts to resolve loops........................................................164 Quiz: Resolving loops in a universe .......................................................................169 Lesson summary........................................................................................................170
Lesson 7
Resolving SQL Traps

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................171 Understanding SQL traps and universes ..............................................................172 About SQL traps ................................................................................................172 Detecting and resolving chasm traps .....................................................................173 Chasm traps .......................................................................................................173 Detecting chasm traps ......................................................................................174 The chasm trap scenario ...................................................................................174 Resolving chasm traps ......................................................................................177 Using multiple SQL statements for each measure to resolve chasm traps......................................................................................................................177 Drawbacks to the multiple SQL statements for each measure method.................................................................................................................179 Using contexts to resolve chasm traps ...........................................................180 Activity: Resolving chasm traps.......................................................................182 Detecting and resolving fan traps ..........................................................................185 Fan traps .............................................................................................................185 The fan trap scenario ........................................................................................186 Resolving fan traps.............................................................................................187 Using aliases and contexts to resolve fan traps.............................................188 Scenario of a fan trap with two tables in a one-to-many relationship........190 Avoiding fan traps altogether .........................................................................192 Activity: Resolving fan traps............................................................................193 Quiz: Resolving SQL traps ......................................................................................197 Lesson summary........................................................................................................198
vii
Lesson 8
Applying Restrictions on Objects

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................199 Restricting the data returned by objects ................................................................200 Defining data restrictions .................................................................................200 Methods of restricting data in end-user modules ........................................201 Drawbacks to applying restrictions to objects ..............................................202 An alternative to applying restrictions to objects .........................................203 Restrictions using condition objects ...............................................................205 Applying restrictions using the tables button ...............................................206 Applying each type of restriction ...................................................................209 Activity: Applying restrictions.........................................................................209 Quiz: Applying restrictions on objects ..................................................................212 Lesson summary........................................................................................................213
Lesson 9
Using @functions with Objects

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................215 Using @functions.......................................................................................................216 Defining @functions ..........................................................................................216 @prompt .............................................................................................................216 @prompt syntax .................................................................................................217 @select..................................................................................................................221 @where.................................................................................................................223 @aggregate_aware..............................................................................................227 Activity: Using @functions...............................................................................228 Quiz: Using @functions with objects .....................................................................230 Lesson summary........................................................................................................231
Lesson 10
Using Hierarchies
Lesson introduction...................................................................................................233 Understanding hierarchies and universes ............................................................234 Hierarchies..........................................................................................................234 Working with hierarchies ........................................................................................236 Default hierarchies ............................................................................................236 Custom hierarchies............................................................................................239 The effect of custom hierarchies on default hierarchies ..............................240 Time hierarchies ................................................................................................242 Testing automatic time hierarchies .................................................................245 Advantages and disadvantages of automatic time hierarchies ..................246
viii
Time hierarchies based on database functions .............................................246 Advantages and disadvantages of database function time hierarchies...........................................................................................................247 Table-based time hierarchies ...........................................................................248 Advantages and disadvantages of table-based time hierarchies ...............249 Activity: Using hierarchies................................................................................250 Quiz: Using hierarchies ............................................................................................252 Lesson summary........................................................................................................253
Lesson 11
Using Lists of Values

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................255 Creating a list of values ............................................................................................256 What is a list of values?.....................................................................................256 Using a list of values (LOV)..............................................................................256 Working with LOVs in Universe Designer ...........................................................257 Associating an LOV with an object..................................................................257 Setting options for generating LOVs ..............................................................259 Editing the LOVs for the entire universe .......................................................260 Adding data to the list by adding columns ...................................................261 Creating a cascading LOV .......................................................................................263 Setting up a cascading LOV .............................................................................263 Activity: Using a cascading LOV in Web Intelligence Rich Client.............265 Quiz: Using lists of values .......................................................................................267 Lesson summary........................................................................................................268
Lesson 12
Creating Derived Tables and Indexes

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................269 Using derived tables .................................................................................................270 What is a derived table?....................................................................................270 Adding derived tables ......................................................................................270 Derived tables as lookup for multiple contexts.............................................271 Nested derived tables........................................................................................273 Creating nested derived tables.........................................................................274 Activity: Adding derived tables.......................................................................275 Applying index awareness ......................................................................................278 What is index awareness?.................................................................................278 Setting up index awareness..............................................................................279 Using an index awareness WHERE clause.....................................................281 Activity: Setting up index awareness..............................................................281 Quiz: Derived tables and indexes ...........................................................................283 Lesson summary........................................................................................................284
ix
Lesson 13
Linking Universes
Lesson introduction...................................................................................................285 Understanding linked universes ............................................................................286 What are linked universes?...............................................................................286 Using linked universes......................................................................................286 Possible linking strategies ................................................................................287 Advantages and limitations to linking............................................................289 Creating links between universes............................................................................290 Linking universes ..............................................................................................290 Including one universe within another...........................................................291 When to link and when to include?.................................................................293 Activity: Linking universes ..............................................................................294 Quiz: Linking universes............................................................................................296 Lesson summary........................................................................................................297
Lesson 14
Applying Universe Access Restrictions

Lesson introduction...................................................................................................299 Setting access restrictions on a universe ................................................................300 About security and universes ..........................................................................300 Completing your restriction set settings.........................................................313 Setting restriction group priority ....................................................................316 Viewing user and group restrictions...............................................................317 Activity: Setting access restrictions..................................................................319 Quiz: Applying universe access restrictions .........................................................320 Lesson summary .......................................................................................................321
Lesson 15
Managing Universes
Lesson introduction...................................................................................................323 Documenting universes ...........................................................................................324 Printing universe details...................................................................................324 Printing options: General..................................................................................326 Printing options: List Components..................................................................326 Printing options: Full Description...................................................................326 Deploying universes..................................................................................................328 About deploying a universe ............................................................................328 What happens when you export a universe?.................................................328 Importing a universe.........................................................................................332 Working with multiple designers....................................................................333
Maintaining universes ..............................................................................................336 Reasons for universe maintenance..................................................................336 Changes to the target database ........................................................................336 Detecting changes to the universe...................................................................337 Adding new tables to an existing universe ...................................................338 The effect of changing objects ..........................................................................338 Deploying universes in multiple languages .........................................................340 Translation Manager .........................................................................................340 Activity: Translating a universe with Translation Manager........................344 Quiz: Managing universes........................................................................................346 Lesson summary........................................................................................................347
Appendix A
End-of-Course Challenge
The challenge..............................................................................................................349 Customer scenario..............................................................................................350 Activity: End-of-course challenge - Part 1......................................................351 Activity: End-of-course challenge - Part 2......................................................353
Appendix B
Understanding Relational and Dimensional Modeling

Understanding the metadata...................................................................................355 Data warehouses........................................................................................................356 Online Transactional Processing systems..............................................................357 Data Marts...................................................................................................................358 Dimensional Modeling..............................................................................................359
Appendix C
SQL syntaxes for other RDBMS

Alternative SQL syntaxes for other RDBMS..........................................................361 ORACLE..............................................................................................................361 DB2.......................................................................................................................363 MySQL.................................................................................................................365 Microsoft Access.................................................................................................367
Answer Key
Quiz: Understanding BusinessObjects universes.................................................371 Quiz: Creating the course universe.........................................................................372 Quiz: Building the universe structure....................................................................373
xi
Quiz: Creating dimension objects...........................................................................374 Quiz: Creating measure objects...............................................................................375 Quiz: Resolving loops in a universe .......................................................................376 Quiz: Resolving SQL traps ......................................................................................377 Quiz: Applying restrictions on objects ..................................................................378 Quiz: Using @functions with objects .....................................................................379 Quiz: Using hierarchies ............................................................................................380 Quiz: Using lists of values .......................................................................................381 Quiz: Derived tables and indexes ...........................................................................382 Quiz: Linking universes............................................................................................383 Quiz: Applying universe access restrictions .........................................................384 Quiz: Managing universes........................................................................................385
xii
Universe Design
Introductions, Course Overview...........................................30 minutes
Lesson 1
Understanding BusinessObjects Universes.....................45 minutes

Defining BusinessObjects universe concepts Using the universe development cycle Lesson 2
Creating the Course Universe...............................................30 minutes

Describing the course database and universe Creating the universe Lesson 3
Building the Universe Structure...........................................45 minutes

Populating the universe structure Defining joins in a universe Lesson 4
Creating Dimension Objects..................................................75 minutes

Describing classes and objects Creating classes and objects Lesson 5
Creating Measure Objects.........................................................1.5 hours

Defining measure object concepts Creating measure objects Creating delegated measure objects Lesson 6
Resolving Loops in a Universe....................................................3 hours

Understanding loops Resolving loops using aliases Resolving loops using contexts
AgendaLearners Guide
xiii
Lesson 7
Resolving SQL Traps.........................................................................1 hour

Understanding SQL traps and universes Detecting and resolving chasm traps Detecting and resolving fan traps Lesson 8
Applying Restrictions on Objects.................................................1 hour

Restricting the data returned by objects Lesson 9
Using @functions with Objects............................................45 minutes

Using @functions Lesson 10
Using Hierarchies......................................................................45 minutes

Understanding hierarchies and universes Working with hierarchies Lesson 11
Using Lists of Values................................................................30 minutes

Creating a list of values Working with LOVs in Universe Designer Creating a cascading LOV Lesson 12
Creating Derived Tables and Indexes.................................75 minutes

Using derived tables Applying index awareness Lesson 13
Linking Universes......................................................................30 minutes

Understanding linked universes Creating links between universes Lesson 14
Applying Universe Access Restrictions.....................................1 hour

Setting access restrictions on a universe
xiv
Lesson 15
Managing Universes.................................................................45 minutes

Documenting universes Deploying universes Maintaining universes Deploying universes in multiple languages
AgendaLearners Guide
xv
xvi
About this Course

Course introduction
This section explains the conventions used in the course and in this training guide.
About this CourseLearners Guide
xvii
Course description
This three-day instructor-led course is designed to give you the comprehensive skills needed to design, build and maintain BusinessObjects 6.5, BusinessObjects XIR1/XIR2, and XI 3.0 universes. You should attend this course to understand universe design concepts and terminology, as well as the role of universes in relation to BusinessObjects reporting tools. The course provides an overview of the process for planning, designing and creating a universe and then walks you through the process of designing a universe that responds to identified requirements. The business benefit of this course is that you will learn best-practice methodology for creating universes that respond to your reporting requirements. Through well-designed universes, report designers and business users will be able to create reports without having to know anything about the underlying data source or structure.
Course audience
This course is designed to teach you how to design BusinessObjects universes using Universe Designer; using BusinessObjects 6.5, BusinessObjects XI R1/R2, or BusinessObjects XI 3.0. New features covered in the XI 3.0 course that are not applicable to BusinessObjects 6.5 or XI R1/R2 learners include: Creating a cascading list of values associated with a hierarchy of objects in a universe Creating delegated measures Creating nested derived tables Using Translation Manager Testing universe results in Web Intelligence Rich Client The target audience for this course is universe designers.
Prerequisites
If you want to learn BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Rich Client reporting skills and concepts, this course is recommended: BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI 3.0: Report Design If you want to increase your skill level and knowledge of BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI reporting skills and concepts, this course is recommended: BusinessObjects Web Intelligence XI R2: Report Design To be successful, learners who attend this course should have the following experience: SQL and relational database management systems concepts and structures Familiarity with the type of data and the logical structure of the databases in their organization Familiarity with BusinessObjects Web Intelligence report building
xviii
Level, delivery, and duration

This core instructor-led offering is a three-day course.
Applicable certifications and designations

This course is not applicable to any Business Objects Certified Professional programs.
Course success factors

Your learning experience will be enhanced by: Activities that build on the life experiences of the learner Discussion that connects the training to real working environments Learners and instructor working as a team Active participation by all learners
Course setup
Refer to the setup guide for details on hardware, software, and course-specific requirements.
Course materials
The materials included with the course materials are: Name card Learners Guide The Learners Guide contains an agenda, learner materials, and practice activities. The Learners Guide is designed to assist students who attend the classroom-based course and outlines what learners can expect to achieve by participating in this course. Evaluation form At the conclusion of this course, you will receive an electronic feedback form as part of our evaluation process. Provide feedback on the course content, instructor, and facility. Your comments will assist us to improve future courses. Additional resources include: Sample files The sample files can include required files for the course activities and/or supplemental content to the training guide. Online Help Retrieve information and find answers to questions using the online Help and/or users guide that are included with the product.
About this CourseLearners Guide
xix
Learning process
Learning is an interactive process between the learners and the instructor. By facilitating a cooperative environment, the instructor guides the learners through the learning framework.
Introduction
Why am I here? Whats in it for me? The learners will be clear about what they are getting out of each lesson.
Objectives
How do I achieve the outcome? The learners will assimilate new concepts and how to apply the ideas presented in the lesson. This step sets the groundwork for practice.
Practice
How do I do it? The learners will demonstrate their knowledge as well as their hands-on skills through the activities.
Review
How did I do? The learners will have an opportunity to review what they have learned during the lesson. Review reinforces why it is important to learn particular concepts or skills.
Summary
Where have I been and where am I going? The summary acts as a recap of the learning objectives and as a transition to the next section.
xx
Lesson 1
Understanding BusinessObjects Universes

Lesson introduction
To design effective and efficient universes for your business users, you need a general understanding of their structure and application. It is also important to become familiar with the process involved in building a successful universe. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Define BusinessObjects universe concepts Use the universe development cycle
Understanding BusinessObjects UniversesLearners Guide
Defining BusinessObjects universe concepts

This lesson gives a general introduction to universes. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe a universe Describe BusinessObjects Universe Designer interface elements Save, export and import universes
What is a universe?
The BusinessObjects universe is the semantic layer that isolates business users from the technical complexities of the databases where their corporate information is stored. For the ease of the end user, universes are made up of objects and classes that map to data in the database, using everyday terms that describe their business environment. This means that by using a universe to create a query, users can retrieve exactly the data that interests them using their own business terminology.
A BusinessObjects universe is a file that contains the following: Connection parameters to a single data source. SQL structures called objects that map to actual SQL structures in the database such as columns, tables, and database functions. Objects are grouped into classes. A schema of the tables and joins used in the database. Objects are built from the database structures that you include in your schema. Note: You associate data to universes by mapping to a data source. Data is not stored in the .unv file. A universe defines the connection to the database. By selecting a universe when creating new documents or editing existing documents, the business users automatically receive access to
the data. The access to data, in turn, is restricted by the objects that are available in the universe. These objects have been created by you, the universe designer, based on the needs profile for a defined user group. End users select the universe they are authorized to access in order to build queries in Web Intelligence, Web Intelligence Rich Client, and/or other BusinessObjects reporting tools. They build a query by selecting objects defined in the universe, and in this way, they are not required to see or know anything about the underlying data structures in the database. BusinessObjects Designer XI Release 2 gives universe designers the ability to build universes from OLAP and metadata sources. It also offers the ability to build universes against Unicode databases and run reports that display data in one of many available languages. BusinessObjects Universe Designer XI 3.0 offers the following additions: Personal file universe creation wizard: Universes have supported access to csv and xls files through generic ODBC. JavaBean: The JavaBean driver provides the ability to expose data returned by a JavaBean class and model it through a universe. Java database connectivity (JDBC): Access to a standard JDBC connection and JDBC support to all major sources is provided. Microsoft Analysis Services 2005: Microsoft Analysis Services 2005 support for OLAP universes is provided.
Universes are used to query the database

The role of the universe is to present a business-focused front end to the SQL structures in the database. The data used in a universe schema depends greatly on the end-user requirements. It needs to provide an easy-to-use interface for end users to: Run queries against a database Create reports Perform data analysis
The semantic layer

A semantic layer is a business representation of corporate data that helps end users access data autonomously using common business terms. Developed and patented by Business Objects, it maps complex data into familiar business terms such as product, customer, or revenue to offer a unified, consolidated view of data across the organization. By using common business terms, rather than data language, to access, manipulate, and organize information, it simplifies the complexity of business data. These business terms are stored as objects in a universe, accessed through queries and reports.
Universes enable business users to access and analyze data stored in a relational database and OLAP cubes. This is core business intelligence (BI) technology that frees users from IT while ensuring correct results. The semantic layer insulates business users from underlying data complexity, while ensuring the business is accessing the correct data sources and using consistent terminology. Benefits include improved end-user productivity and greater business autonomy from IT in accessing data.
Universe Designer and the semantic layer

Universe Designer can be seen as the tool which creates the semantic layer. Metadata is imported into Universe Designer, and then the tables structure can be changed (using Derived Tables) or data can be changed before it is presented to the user (by manipulating objects). However, the source data essentially remains the same. This is what separates the semantic layer from Data Integrator. Data Integrator is an ETL tool which can change the structure of the data, and also cleanse it from data errors. The semantic layer is also used for Dashboards and Analytics. When building a Dashboard Builder or Set Analysis Metrics universe, the approach is slightly different to creating a normal ad hoc reporting universe: The Dashboard Builder or Set Analysis Metrics universe requires custom tags embedded within it (which can be considered a form of code), which are used by Dashboard Builder and Set Analysis products. A mandatory self-restricting join is placed in the Dashboard Builder or Set Analysis Metrics universe to ensure that calculated metrics apply to one time period granularity in a time dimension, for example, daily, weekly, or monthly. This can also be done in the form of a WHERE clause restriction in each measure object, to prompt for a start and end date period. Custom filters are placed into the Dashboard Builder or Set Analysis Metrics universe to be able to compare sets (Joiner Filter, Leaver Filter, and so on), and to build metrics. This is why it is advisable not to use the same ad hoc reporting universe as your Dashboard Builder or Set Analysis Metrics universe. Information on building a Dashboard Builder or Set Analysis Metrics universe can be found in the Creating universes for use as metrics chapter of the BusinessObjects XI 3.0 Designer's Guide.
What type of database schema is used?

Before developing a universe you must familiarize yourself with the underlying data. Which type of database schema is going to be used for the universe? Will this be a Data Warehouse model, an Online Transactional Processing system (OLTP), or a Data Mart? How can you best implement the metadata into a universe schema to meet the end-user requirements?
Star Schemas
The star schema is the simplest data warehouse schema. It is called a star schema because the diagram resembles a star, with points radiating from a center. The center of the star consists of one or more fact tables and the points of the star are the dimension tables. A star schema consists of fact tables and dimension tables: Fact tables A fact table typically has two types of columns: numeric facts and foreign keys to dimension tables. Facts can become measure objects in a BusinessObjects universe file. Dimension tables Dimension tables contain the qualitative descriptions that can be applied to the facts. Hierarchies may also be built into dimension tables. Dimension table data can become dimension or detail objects in a BusinessObjects universe file.
Snowflake schemas
The snowflake schema is a variation of the star schema used in a data warehouse. It is more complex than the star schema because the tables which describe the dimensions are normalized.
Data modeling
The traditional entity relationship (ER) model uses a normalized approach to database design. Database normalization is a technique for designing relational database tables to minimize duplication of information and to avoid data anomalies. Higher degrees of normalization typically involve more tables and create the need for a larger number of joins, which can reduce performance. Denormalization is the process of taking a normalized database and modifying table structures to optimize the performance by keeping a minimum relationship between tables; one dimension table versus one fact table. Another method is to use prebuilt summarized data in the schema.
Classes and objects

A universe contains the following structures:
Classes Objects As the universe designer, you use Universe Designer to create objects and classes that represent database structures. The objects you create in the universe must be relevant to the end users business environment and vocabulary.
Classes
A class is a logical grouping of objects within a universe. It represents a category of objects. The name of a class should indicate the category of the objects that it contains. A class can be divided hierarchically into subclasses.
Objects
An object is a named component that maps to data or derived data in the database. The name of an object should be drawn from the business vocabulary of the targeted user group.
Advantages of a universe
The advantages of a universe are: Only the universe designer needs to know how to write SQL and understand the structure of the target database. The interface allows you to create a universe in an easy-to-use graphical environment. Data is secure. Users can see only the data exposed by the universe. Users can only read data, not edit it. The results are reliable and the universe is relatively easy to maintain. Users can use a simple interface to create reports. All users work with consistent business terminology. Users can analyze data locally.
BusinessObjects Universe Designer components

You create, modify, and update universes with Universe Designer. Universe Designer provides a connection wizard that allows you to connect to your database middleware. You can create multiple connections with Universe Designer, but only one connection can be defined for each universe. This database connection is saved with the universe. Universe Designer provides a graphical interface that allows you to select and view tables in a database. The database tables are represented as table symbols in a schema diagram. You can use this interface to manipulate tables, create joins that link the tables, create alias tables, contexts, and resolve loops in your schema. Users do not see this schema. Universe Designer provides an object explorer view. You use the explorer tree to create objects that map to the columns and SQL structures that are represented in the schema view. Users select these objects to run queries against a database.
Starting Universe Designer

Universe Designer can only be used with a BusinessObjects repository. You must log onto the repository before starting Universe Designer. After you start Universe Designer, you can open a universe in one of the following ways: Create a new universe. Import a universe from the repository. Open a universe directly from the file system. A universe is available to end users once it has been exported to the repository. Importing a universe, making changes, then exporting the updated universe to the repository is the most common way of working with Universe Designer. Note: You can save a universe to the file system. You do this when you are in the process of developing the universe locally and when you want to share the universe with other users who may not have connection rights to the target repository. Note: You can lock and secure a universe before importing it from or exporting it to the Business Objects repository for maintenance.
To start Universe Designer

1. Click the Start button on the taskbar. 2. Select the Programs menu. 3. Select the BusinessObjects XI 3.0 menu. 4. Select the BusinessObjects Enterprise menu. 5. Select the Designer menu. The login dialog box for the repository appears.
Login information System User Name Password Authentication name of the repository server your repository user name your repository password authentication method
Note: This information is normally provided to you by the Business Objects administrator. Note: You can also use Universe Designer standalone. Use the authentication method Standalone (No CMS). 6. Click the OK button. The Universe Designer start-up screen appears, and an empty Universe Designer session opens. The user name and repository name appear in the title bar. Note: Depending on options set for Universe Designer, the Quick Design Wizard can start automatically when you start in Universe Designer. Click Cancel to close the wizard.
Using the Quick Design Wizard

When you start a Universe Designer session for the first time, the Quick Design Wizard appears by default. You can use the wizard to quickly create a universe or to familiarize yourself with Universe Designer. However, unless your data source is a very simple model, it is not an appropriate tool for creating a complete universe that responds to end-user reporting requirements. Once you are familiar with Universe Designer, you will probably decide to disable the wizard and not use it to design universes. All the universe design, building, maintenance information, and procedures in this training manual are structured with the assumption that you have disabled the Quick Design Wizard.
To deactivate the Quick Design Wizard

You can prevent the wizard from appearing automatically when you create a new universe as follows: 1. Select Tools Options. Select the General tab. 2. Clear the Show Welcome Wizard check box, and click OK. Note: This check box is already cleared if you have cleared the Run this wizard at startup check box from the Startup Wizard Welcome page. Note: You can activate the Quick Design Wizard at any time by selecting the above check boxes from the General page of the Options dialog box.
Using Universe Designer module commands

There are three ways to issue commands in Universe Designer: Menu options Toolbar buttons Right-click menus
Menu options
You can perform most tasks by choosing options from the menu. The Universe Designer menu bar looks like this:
Toolbar buttons
The toolbar gives you quick access to many tasks. Universe Designer has three toolbars: the Standard toolbar, the Editing toolbar, and the Formula Bar toolbar.
Right-click menus
Right-click menus display on your screen when you click the right mouse button. These menus usually give you access to options related to the task you are currently performing. For example, if you right-click in the Universe pane, a drop-down menu for creating classes and objects is displayed:
Universe Designer window

The Universe Designer window is made up of two segments. On the right-hand side is the pane in which you insert the database tables and then view the universe structure that infers the FROM and SELECT clauses into a Select statement.
This is known as the Structure pane. On the left-hand side is the pane in which you create the classes and objects that users will see when they build queries using this universe. The objects physically point to the tables you see in the Structure pane. This is known as the Universe pane.
Manipulating the structure view

There are three ways to manipulate the Structure pane in the Universe Designer window: toolbar buttons, drag and drop, and by using the Options panel.
Zoom
Often it is not possible to view the entire schema at normal magnification due to its size. Zoom in or out using the drop-down list on the toolbar to choose your percentage view for the schema.
Arrange tables
You can select this button to have Universe Designer automatically organize your tables sequentially and horizontally. Note: You can undo only the last command. If you do not like the arrange tables results, choose Undo from the Edit menu.
Drag and Drop

Different views of the universe structure can be achieved by selecting items and applying a command using one of the following methods: Double-clicking Dragging and dropping Right-clicking For example:
Procedure Action
To mark a single table To mark a join
Click the header of the table. Click it. Ctrl-click the header of each table (or join) you want to highlight. Ctrl-A.
To mark more than one table or join
To mark all tables and joins
10
Procedure
Action
To move a table
Click the header of the table and drag and drop the table to the desired position. By default, the table header and a specified number of its columns are shown for all tables contained in the universe structure segment. This view can be altered for an individual table by double-clicking the table header. Double-click once to roll up a table so that only the header is shown. Double-click twice so that only the table header and key columns are shown. Double-click three times to return to an unrolled view of the table. If the view of a table does not show all the columns contained within that table, this is signified by three dots at the bottom of the table. Click the header of the table; a scroll bar appears on the right of the table. Alternatively, place the pointer on the bottom margin of the table and a double-headed arrow appears. You can then drag the bottom margin down to expand the number of columns shown in the table. To achieve this the table header must not be highlighted.
To roll up a table
To view the columns of a table
To view the remaining columns
To gain a partial view of the data content of the table
Right-click the table header and choose the View Table Values option. Right-click the column required and choose the View Column Values option.
To view the data values for a single column
By default, data is only displayed for the first 100 rows of the table. This number can be expanded or reduced using the Tools Options Database tab.
11
Procedure
Action
To view the number of rows for a table in the database
Right-click the table header (or structure segment background if you want the number of rows for all tables) and then choose the Number of Rows in Table option. If you are front ending a large database, this may not be advisable due to the time it takes to process.
Saving and exporting a universe

Regularly save your universes during a work session. When you save a universe, Universe Designer stores it as a file with a .unv extension in your local file system. This is usually a universe folder in the BusinessObjects installation path. Any changes you have made to the universe file are saved locally but are not propagated to the universe version in the repository until you choose to export it. When you export the universe, the updated version is saved on the local file system, but it is copied to the BusinessObjects repository as well. This version is then available to end users connecting to the universe. It is also made available to other universe designers who are authorized by the BusinessObjects Administrator to access it. Regularly save your changes to a universe locally. When you have finished updating the universe, export the latest saved version to the repository. If you choose to browse to a copy of that universe file on your local file system and open it directly in Universe Designer, the file may not be the latest version of the universe. If you want to make changes to a universe that has already been exported to the repository, do not open a universe file directly using File Open menu. Instead, use File Import to ensure that you are viewing the most recent version. Make your modifications and export your universe again to make your changes available in the repository.
Importing a universe
When you import a universe, you import the latest version of the universe from the repository. The universe is copied to the local file system, and this file is opened in Universe Designer. You can import one or more universes stored in a universe folder in the repository.
To import a universe
1. Select the Import command from the File menu. The Import Universe dialog box appears.
12
2. Select a universe folder from the drop-down list. Note: You can also import a universe by clicking the Browse button to select the universe you would like to import. Note: If you want to lock the universe, double-click the universe name. A locked universe appears with a padlock symbol. Locking a universe prevents other designers from importing or exporting this universe. The locked universe can still be read by users and other designers. To unlock a universe, double-click it again. 3. Click the universe name. This is the universe that you want to import. 4. Verify the file path for the import folder in the Import Folder box. This points to the location where the universes are exported. 5. Click OK.
Universe file names as identifiers

The universe name can be different from the .unv file name. When you use Save As to save the universe under a new name, the new universe is not associated in the repository. You must export the new universe to the repository to create a version of the new universe. You can use the following methods to save a universe: 1. Select File Save from the menu bar. 2. Click the Save icon. 3. Press CTRL+S on the keyboard. Do not save two different universes with the same file name. This leads to conflicts when you attempt to export these universes to the repository.
Saving a universe definition as PDF

You can also save the universe information in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF). This allows you to save to a PDF file with the same attributes that are defined for printing purposes.
Note: You can view the default attributes by selecting the Tools Options menu and selecting the Print/PDF tab. The Options dialog box will be presented in detail in a later lesson.
The attributes that you can print or save to a PDF file include: General information: Parameters, linked universes, and the graphical table schema. Component lists:
13
Lists of components in the universe including objects, conditions, hierarchies, tables, joins, and contexts. Component descriptions: Descriptions for the objects, conditions, hierarchies, tables, joins, and contexts in the universe. Saving these attributes as a PDF file may be helpful for troubleshooting or maintenance purposes.
To save universe information as a PDF file

1. In Universe Designer, open the universe you want to save as a PDF file. 2. Select File Save As. 3. Select Portable Document Format (PDF) from the Save As type drop- down list. 4. Click Save.
Giving all users access to a universe

If you want to make a universe available to universe designers who may not have access to your Central Management Server, you must save the universe with an unsecured connection.
To make a universe accessible to all Universe Designer users

1. Verify that the universe that you want to make available to all users does not have a secured connection. To save a universe for all users, a shared or personal connection is required. Note: Secured connections are required to export universes to the repository. If a universe has a secured connection, select or create a new personal or shared connection. Note: Creating connections is discussed in detail in a later lesson. 2. Select File Save As. 3. A File Save dialog box appears. 4. Select the Save For All Users check box. 5. Click OK.
Activity: Viewing a universe in Universe Designer

Objective
Open a universe and identify universe elements in Universe Designer
Instructions
1. Open Universe Designer.
14
2. In Universe Designer, click File Open. Browse to the eFashion.unv file found in the default installation folder:
C:\Program Files\Business Objects\BusinessObjects Enterprise 12.0\Samples\en\UniverseSamples
Or, find the same file on the resource CD for this course. 3. Explore the menu options, toolbar buttons, and right-click drop-down menus. 4. Select View Toolbars, and ensure that all three toolbars are selected. 5. Zoom to 125% (type directly into the field instead of using the drop-down list). 6. Click View Arrange Tables to automatically organize tables. 7. Click View List Mode to list all Tables, Joins, and Contexts. 8. Click the Article_Color_Lookup table in the Tables list and to see it highlighted in the structure below. 9. Select Tools Options and click on the Graphics menu tab. 10.Select the Show row count check box, and click OK. 11.Right-click the Article_Color_Lookup table to view the number of rows in the table (Refresh row count for all tables). 12.Right-click the Article_Color_Lookup table to view a sample of the table values. 13.Open the Product class to view the objects it contains. 14.Double-click the Color object (notice the name, description, and select fields). 15.Select Parameters on the File menu and change the universe long name to New eFashion. 16.Close the universe.
15
Using the universe development cycle

Universe development is a cyclical process that includes planning, designing, building, distribution, and maintenance phases. Use Universe Designer to design and build a universe. However, the usability of any universe is directly related to how successfully the other phases in the development cycle interact with each other. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Use the universe development cycle
The universe development cycle process

The universe development cycle presents an overview of a universe designing methodology that you can use to plan and implement a universe development project. The diagram below outlines the major phases in a typical universe development cycle:
The analysis of user requirements and design are the most important stages in the process. Users must be heavily involved in the development process if the universe is going to fulfill their needs both with the business language used to name objects and the data that can be accessed. Implementation will be successful if the first three stages are carried out properly. It is advisable to spend 80% of the time allocated to the development of a universe on the first three stages: preparing analyzing planning
16
If you have spent the appropriate amount of time in laying the foundation for your universe, the remaining 20% of the time spent actually using Universe Designer to build your universe will be much more productive.
Preparation phase
During the preparation phase, the scope of a BusinessObjects universe is defined. The production and development architectures are identified and reviewed. Project teams are assembled and the initial task plan is defined.
Identify universe scope
The definition and communication of project scope eliminates risk associated with deploying the universe to pilot users during the Implementation phase. The scope is defined in terms of intended functionality of the universe. Identification of target users of the universe also helps create a shared understanding of project objectives. Key managers should be involved in the scoping process. Once formulated, the objectives of the project are communicated to everyone involved, directly or indirectly.
Build a project team
In designating the team members, individuals must be chosen to fill the following roles. One person may fill multiple roles.
Role Sponsor Task Usually the individual funding the project. The project sponsor makes any final decisions regarding scope or unresolvable issues. The project leader develops the project plan, assigns resources, tracks, and reports on progress. Individual who gathers requirements in the form of candidate objects. An individual familiar with the data structures. Provides ongoing business perspective for developers. Users who will work with the universe during the universe build and development phase. An individual with BusinessObjects experience who is not part of the development process will perform a technical review of the final product.
Project Leader Analyst Data Expert Key User Pilot Users
QA Reviewer
17
In most cases, a single person will be responsible for the bulk of the work, filling the roles of Analyst, BusinessObjects Administrator, and Data Expert. In designing and building the universe, this person will maintain a relationship with the Key User, who should also be one of the Pilot Users. This developer usually reports to a Manager or IS Director, who serves as Project Leader. The Leader maintains a close relationship with the Sponsor. Other roles that will be impacted by the project include the Database Administrator, the System Administrator, and the Data Administrator.
Adopt standards
Standards for the components of a BusinessObjects universe will help to guarantee consistency and stability in the final product. During preparation, the team adopts a set of standards for BusinessObjects components. Standards can be specified for: Universe names Object definition guidelines Names for objects Class names Alias names Help text
The standards may be revised during the course of the first universe development project as the team becomes more familiar with the product.
Conduct a meeting
Communicate the preparation phase strategy in a meeting. This is your opportunity to gather all interested parties (developers, users, the sponsor) to ensure that everyone understands the scope of the endeavor. You can use this meeting to demonstrate BusinessObjects products and to help set expectations of the user community.
Analysis phase
The primary objective of analysis activities is to identify user requirements for the ad hoc query environment. These requirements are captured in the form of candidate classes and objects.
18
Identify candidate objects
There are many places to look for candidate objects. The best way to identify them is by talking to the end users. When interviewing end users, the type of questions to ask are: What type of information do you need to do your job?, How do you know you are doing well?, How does your boss know you are performing well?, or What kind of information do others ask you for? As users answer these questions, document their answers in terms of class and object requirements. For example, if a user states, We need to retrieve information on employees by department and hire date you have identified a potential class (information about employees) and an object or two (department and hire date). When you identify a potential class, probe for objects. For example, What kind of information about Employees do they want? Candidate classes and objects can also be identified by reviewing existing reports. Document your classes and objects. For example:
Type Name Description Information on a customer, including location, credit ratings, and shipping preferences. This object can be combined with date ranges, customers, and/or products to provide meaningful measures. Source
Class
Customer
Interview #1
Object (Measure)
Total
Revenue
Interview #3, #4
You should also try to document the qualification of objects (dimension/detail/ measure) and any potentially identified hierarchies.
Relational modeling versus multi-dimensional modeling
The questions asked during BusinessObjects interviews are similar to those asked in the development of OLTP applications. What is done with the answers is very different. When conducting Analysis for an OLTP application, analysts document data requirements in entity relationship diagrams. Rules of normalization are applied to the items that users request, breaking them down to an atomic level, or eliminating calculated objects. These activities optimize the data for storage in a relational database. By contrast, requirements for an ad hoc query environment should be expressed in terms that are optimized for retrieval of the information. A successful BusinessObjects universe presents information to a business person using user specific business terminology. The developer must unlearn analysis techniques used for the
19
development of application systems. User requirements must be taken at face value, remaining in business terms. Basic rules of thumb: Do not normalize Do not eliminate objects that can be derived from other objects Do not try to figure out where this data can be found in the database For example: in an interview, a user states I need to look at annual sales figures by region. Document this at face value; identify the requirements, but do not attempt to transform them in a manner appropriate for storage in a relational database. You can identify three candidate objects: Year of Sale, Sales Amount, and Region. Do not eliminate Year of Sale because you have already documented a Date of Sale object. Do not reduce Sales to the components from which it is calculated (perhaps quantity multiplied by price). Instead of normalizing object requirements, identify how they will support on-line analysis by end users. Identifying candidate objects as dimensions, details or measures will facilitate end user reporting and analysis flexibility. You can also plan for scope of analysis (drill-down and drill-up options) by identifying dimensional hierarchies. Once you have gathered and documented requirements in the form of candidate objects, you are ready to begin to plan the BusinessObjects universe requirements.
Planning phase
The planning phase will be used to identify a project strategy and determine resource requirements.
Create a project plan
The project plan is the key to timely implementation. For each task, the plan should assign responsibility and target dates. Creation of the plan and the tracking of progress against the plan are the primary responsibilities of the project leader.
Plan the BusinessObjects architecture
Technical architecture requirements may have been looked at in general in the preparation phase. A review of the technical architecture should take place during the planning phase of the project. Items to review include:
Development environment Identify resources required to support a universe development environment.
20
Production environment Computers
Identify resources required for a universe production environment. Review required computing resources for developer and user workstations. Ensure infrastructure is in place to support connectivity between users/developers and the repository and data stores, including appropriate middle-ware to support communication between clients and servers. Identify planned configuration for client software. Ensure appropriate resources are available. Initiate a first look at security requirements. Develop support policy for when the universe goes into production. Identify procedures for the request, review, approval, and implementation of changes to the universe when in production. Plan for a user training program.
Connectivity
Configuration Security Support plan Change management plan Training plan
Implementation phase
The implementation phase can be split up into two stages: 1. Designing the schema 2. Building the universe
Implementation phase 1: schema design
The first task during schema design is to determine and document the data source for each candidate object. If requirements were gathered in a tabular format, add a column to the table where you can indicate the SQL fragment and source tables that will be used to retrieve the object.
Type Name SQL fragment Description Information on a customer, including location, credit ratings, and shipping preferences. Source Interview #1
Class
Customer
21
Type
Name
SQL fragment
Description
Source
SQL:
Object (Measure) Total Revenue sum(order_lines.quantity* products.price) This object can be combined with date ranges, customers, and/or products to provide meaningful measures. Interview #3,4
Source Tables: Order_Lines, Products
Any candidate classes that were captured as general requirements without specific objects must be expanded now. For example, suppose there was a candidate class called Customer and the specific objects within this class were not identified. During the schema design stage, the developer must fill out this class. The developer might fill it out based on knowledge of the business by including all columns from one or more tables, or the developer might go back to users for more detail. There are several ways that objects can be mapped to enterprise data. Simple objects map back to a single column in the database. An example would be Customer First Name, which maps back to the First_Name column in the Customers table. Complex objects make use of SQL to manipulate data that comes from one or more columns. For example, a Customer Full Name object might connect the First_Name and Last_Name columns from the Customers table. Aggregate objects involve SQL GROUP functions. Counts, sums, and averages are all aggregate objects. The Total Revenue object is an aggregate object; it uses the SQL SUM function.
Plan for object qualifications and drill-down functionality

As you design the universe, you must complete the process you began during analysis. Identify each object as a measure, a dimension or a detail. For each detail object, identify the dimension it is associated with. Similarly, you need to identify hierarchies within your dimensions. These hierarchies will later enable users to drill-down and drill-up.
Design a table diagram

Now that the objects are mapped back to data sources, the developer reviews all the objects and produces a table-diagram of the database objects that will support the universe. Joins between the tables are then added to the diagram. The table diagram is a valuable tool for resolving loops and SQL traps in the model. It will also become an important reference for developers. Note: This diagram design is usually done on paper, however this can be created directly in the BusinessObjects Universe Designer software. Tip: If you find that you have documented a vast amount of classes and objects based on user requirements you may consider designing schemas that can be used to build:
22
1. Multiple universes which cater to a specific function within the business, reducing the complexity and amount of classes and objects. 2. Multiple universes specific to a business function, as this will prevent users from creating queries that can span the spectrum of the business.
Revise objects and table diagram

Once loops and SQL traps are resolved, the design of some objects will require modification. Any object based on a table that was replaced by an alias must be updated. Consult your table of objects created in the preparation phase for such objects. Note: If you are already using Universe Designer for the schema design you can view a tables associated objects to identify which objects require changes. Some objects may be applicable in the context of more than one of the aliases; these objects will be split into multiple objects. Make sure that object names make it clear what each one represents.
Review join strategy

Where table relationships are optional, the type of join to use must be chosen carefully. The use of standard (or inner) versus outer joins will impact the results of user queries. Using the wrong type of join may provide results that are not what users expect. In SQL, a standard join between two tables will return only rows where both tables meet the join criteria. If one of the tables has no corresponding row in the second table, its data will not be returned. An outer join tells the database processing the SQL query to substitute a null row if one of the joined tables has no corresponding row in the other table. With an outer join, information in one table that does not have corresponding data in the second table is returned with blanks in columns from the second table. The developer must review join possibilities with a key user wherever optional relationships exist. The chosen solution should produce results that users are most likely to expect.
Identify allowable object usage

The developer may identify certain objects that should not be used in qualifications by end users. Certain complex objects may not be usable in qualifications for technical reasons, or there may be performance considerations.
Determine security approach

Security requirements must also be addressed during the Implementation phase. Solutions to security requirements may involve complex object definition, reliance on database-level security, use of BusinessObjects access levels (public, private, controlled), restriction sets or the development of multiple universes. Chosen solutions may impact the database administrator and developers.
23
Implementation phase 2: building the universe
Once the schema design stage is complete, the development team is ready to begin using the BusinessObjects Universe Designer software to build the universe. Tip: Remember that it is better to have several smaller less complex universes than one large universe. This will reduce maintenance, avoid potential security impacts and will improve overall usability. Pilot users then begin to use the universe. They provide feedback to developers who refine the universe until build is completed.
Build the universe

The BusinessObjects Universe Designer software is used to actually build the universe. The developer must: Name the universe. Set up the universe parameters and connect to the relevant data source. Create aliases and contexts as identified in the schema design. Create joins as identified in the schema design. Create classes, subclasses and objects as identified in the schema design. Define objects as dimensions, details, or measures. Define hierarchies. Define lists of values and help text. Define conditions and implement user security, where applicable.
Supply prebuilt queries and reports

During the build stage, the team may identify certain queries and reports that will be of value to the entire enterprise. Created at anytime throughout the build, these queries and reports are re-checked after the universe is finalized to ensure that objects used have not been renamed or removed. They are then exported to the repository so that they are available to all users.
Testing phase
The pilot testing and refinement phase follows universe design implementation. Once an initial universe is built, it is deployed to the pilot users. These users work with the universe and provide feedback to the developers.
24
Types of feedback include: Better names for classes and objects. Objects not in the universe that should be added. Objects that can be removed. Better ways to organize objects (for example, move an object from one class to another, reclassifying a dimension as a detail, and so on). Objects or queries that do not behave as expected. Based on this feedback, the universe is modified. The modified universe is made available to the pilot users for further evaluation. The testing phase can also address potential performance issues. As a developer you can look at implementing performance enhancements to the universe.
Quality assurance
After the build is finalized, the universe is reviewed for quality assurance. An independent reviewer makes the following checks: Corporate standards for universe, object, class, and alias naming are followed. Objects are only defined with tables that are referenced in the select text or Where condition. Objects return results without syntactic error. Objects return intended business results. Objects are correctly classified as dimensions, details or measures. Defined hierarchies make sense. Objects have help text. Aliases are used appropriately. Join syntax and foreign keys are accurate. Standard and outer joins are used appropriately. These checks are best made by an individual who was not part of the development of the universe, guaranteeing an objective perspective. Any issues that are identified are reported to the developers for correction and review.
Deployment phase
The universe has been built, and has passed all quality assurance checks. It is now ready for deployment. The final deployment of the universe cannot begin until any architectural issues identified during planning phase have been addressed. These issues include the establishment of user connectivity, planning the installation configuration, preparation of a training program, and identification of support and change management processes.
Architecture
25
Architectural considerations identified during the planning phase are reviewed. Any issues that have not been resolved will delay the deployment phase.
Production environment
The production environment has been set up in accordance with the architecture and security plans identified during preparation and planning. The universe is modified to access data from production systems, rather than from development systems and is exported to the production repository.
Granting user access
Any database accounts that will be required for BusinessObjects users should be created by the database administrator. These accounts should be given appropriate access privileges to the data objects used by the universe. Users are also added to the Central Management System (CMS) and granted access to the universe.
Conduct training
The release of the BusinessObjects universe to production users is coordinated with system and database administrators as appropriate. The user training program is executed in conjunction with the roll-out of the universe. Without appropriate training, users will not derive benefits from BusinessObjects, regardless of the quality of the universe.
Updating/maintenance
Be sure to inform users about the support and change control mechanisms available to them. They need to know who to call if they have a problem or question, and what procedure should be followed to request a change to the universe. These mechanisms were identified during the planning phase.
26
Prepackaged solutions
If you are designing a universe for Business Objects developers for developing precreated/ prepackaged reports, then the following items should be taken into consideration: Predefine all filters and calculations that are used in standard documents, to remain consistent throughout. The universe can cover more than one business function, to allow cross functional reporting. Precreated reports tend to cross reference reports against different business functions. The universe will, therefore, have to cover multiple business functions to provide end-to-end business reporting.
Activity: Planning a universe

Objective
Use the first three stages of the universe development cycle.
Instructions
1. From the resource CD (Activity_Resources > Lesson 1) launch the Planning_universe_activity.html file, to familiarize yourself with the universe development cycle and to complete the activity questions. 2. Use this checklist of questions you need to ask when you begin designing a universe: What are the target data sources for your universes? What is the schema/structure of each of these data sources? Do you know the contents of each of the tables? Do you know how each of the tables are interrelated? Are you familiar with all of the necessary joins? Are you familiar with the cardinality of each of these joins? Have you procured database schemas from the database administrators who administrate the data sources? Are you familiar with your different user populations and how they are structured? Do you know what standard reports are required? Do you know what the users' ad hoc information needs are? Are you familiar with their business terminology and formats? Have you considered how many universes need to be created to address users' needs? Have you considered how long universe development may take? Have you considered which universes should be developed before others? Have you considered who should test your universes for you?
27
Have you considered how data sources and/or user requirements may change over time? Do you already have all of the information necessary to implement your universes?
28
Quiz: Understanding BusinessObjects universes

1. What are the two main panes in Universe Designer? 2. What are the three ways to issue commands in Universe Designer? 3. Where can you define what specific information about the universe gets printed?
29
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Define BusinessObjects universe concepts Use the universe development cycle
30
Lesson 2
Creating the Course Universe

Lesson introduction
This lesson introduces you to the database that is used in this course. It teaches you how to create a new universe and define a connection from the universe to the course database. To create a new universe and maximize its potential, it is necessary to learn about parameters. Parameters allow you to set the structure of your universe, including setting up a database connection. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the course database and universe Create the course universes
Creating the Course UniverseLearners Guide
31
Describing the course database and universe

In order to create a BusinessObjects universe, you must first be familiar with the data and structure of the database to which the universe will be connected. You also need to fully understand the users reporting requirements. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand the database used during this course Know the specifications of the universes built during this course
The course database

During this course, you are going to build universes to report on a database for a fictional car sales and rentals organization called Prestige Motors. The database has the following characteristics: There are three showrooms, two in the US and one in the UK. Each showroom has the franchise for a number of different car makers, who all manufacture a number of different models, available in a range of colors. Customers may either rent or buy cars. Customers will usually rent or buy from the showroom in their own country but this is not always the case. The database contains data for two financial years 2003/2004 and 2004/2005. Each year begins on April 6 and ends on April 5 in the subsequent year. Information about employees who work within the organization is also available in the database. There are summary tables for quarterly and annual revenue and numbers to speed up queries. The data is stored in a SQL Server 2005 database. Connections to the database are to be made using ODBC.
Assumptions
There has been no inflation over the different years for which data is held. There is no stock data. All manufacturers are able to supply on demand. Users in all countries use the same currency (the US dollar). No new models have been brought out during the period.
Analysis of reporting requirements

Following an analysis of the companys reporting needs, the following specification has been identified. 1. Ad hoc reports are required on models. These are required to list the cars for sale and rent.
32
Such reports may include the following: manufacturer, model, trim, engine size, available colors, and sale/rental price.
Reports may be grouped by price range and style (for example, sport, or estate.) These reports will be used to show potential customers model availability and for general management reporting.
2. A report is required which lists the showrooms, their location and which manufacturers they have a dealership agreement with. This report will be created by the universe designer and distributed as a corporate document for all to read and refresh. 3. Ad hoc reports are required on car sales. These are required to list car, sale and customer details. Reports may be grouped according to customer, showroom, sale, model and manufacturer dimensions. These reports will be used to analyze results at all levels from sales specific details to general high level reports such as sales revenue per annum, per showroom, by manufacturer, or by car. 4. Ad hoc reports are required on car rentals. These are required to list car, rental and customer details. Reports may be grouped according to customer, showroom, rental, model and manufacturer dimensions. These reports will be used to analyze results at all levels from specific rentals details to general high-level reports such as rentals revenue per annum, per showroom, by manufacturer, or by car. Reports related to 2, and 3 will be used by sales staff, finance department staff, and managers. 5. Ad hoc reports on employees. The employee reports will only be available to Managers and the Personnel Department staff. Therefore, a different universe will be used so that only these people have access to this data. Note: Most users will be required to run reports on both sales and rentals.
Development plan
The remainder of this course will be spent developing universes for this imaginary deployment. In accordance with the iterative approach, the development will be phased as indicated below. 1. Design and develop a universe which enables end users to build reports which meet requirements 1 (model reporting) and 3 (sales reporting). The universe needed to do this can be regarded as relatively simple to create. 2. Extend the universe to meet reporting requirements 2 (franchise reporting) and 4 (rental reporting). This requires the introduction of loops, chasm and fan traps into the universe structure which need to be resolved. This constitutes a fairly complex universe structure.
33
3. Further extend the universe to refine and enhance the universe for end users by introducing conditions, LOVs and hierarchies for drilling. 4. Design and develop a universe for end users that enables them to build reports which meet requirements 5 (ad hoc reporting on employees).
34
Creating the universe

In this unit, you will begin to create the course universe, based on the analysis of business requirements and the development plan. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Create a new data source name Create a new connection in Universe Designer Create a new universe Describe the universe parameter settings
Setting the database connection

In order to create a universe, you need to create a BusinessObjects connection to the database you intend to use. A connection is a named set of parameters that defines how a Business Objects application accesses data in a database file. A connection links Business Objects querying tools to your middleware. You must have a connection to access data. The BusinessObjects connection contains all pertinent information for how to connect to the target database (for example: data access driver (middleware), connect string, connection type, and advanced connection parameters). If you are building several universes to front end the same database, then the connection may already exist. Therefore, you only have to select it from the available connections. However, if the connection does not exist, you have to create one.
Data access drivers

A data access driver is the software layer that connects a universe to your middleware. Data access drivers are shipped with Business Objects products. There is a data access driver for each supported middleware. When you install Universe Designer, your data access key determines which data access drivers are installed. When you create a new connection, you select the appropriate data access driver for the relational database management system (RDBMS) middleware that you use to connect to the target RDBMS. The types of databases supported through data access drivers are: IBM DB2 Informix Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Red Brick Sybase NRC (Teradata)
35
Hyperion Generic ODBC With the new XI architecture, connections can now be made to MS Analysis Services 2000, MySQL, and SAP. Additional connection options shown below have been added in XI R2 and XI 3.0.
ODBC connection drivers

Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is Microsoft's strategic interface for accessing data in a heterogeneous environment of relational and non-relational database management systems. An ODBC Driver can be the "back end" for a DBMS (Database Management System) server environment. Any ODBC client can access any DBMS for which there is an ODBC Driver, for example SQL Server, Oracle, AS/400, Foxpro, Microsoft Access, or any DBMS for which an ODBC driver exists. Note: Connections to the database can be made using ODBC as well as OLE DB (Object Linking and Embedding Database). OLE DB extends the ODBC feature set to support a wider variety of non-relational databases, such as object databases and spreadsheets that do not necessarily implement SQL.
36
To create an ODBC connection for SQL Server 2005

Note: This example describes how to create an ODBC connection. Direct connections are supported for certain database vendors, therefore the ODBC setup is not always required. SQL Server 2005 is the database used for this course. For this course ODBC is used to connect to the SQL Server 2005 database.
Note: Steps outlined below apply to any version of SQL Server.
1. Navigate to the ODBC Data Source Administrator wizard. Start Programs Administrative Tools Data Sources (ODBC) Start Settings Control Panel Administrative Tools Data Sources (ODBC) 2. Click the System DSN tab. 3. Click Add. 4. Scroll down to select the SQL Server driver, and then click Finish. 5. In the Create a New Data Source to SQL Server window add or select the following: In the Name box, type a name that identifies the database you want to connect to. In the Server box, type (local) - unless SQL Server is installed on another machine. In that case, select the machine name from the list. 6. Click Next. 7. For the authentication, select the appropriate method for SQL Server to authenticate the login ID. Depending on the selected option, type in the required Windows or SQL Server authentication user name and password. 8. Select the Change the default database to check box, and then select the database to connect to from the drop-down list. 9. Click Next, and then click Finish. 10.Click Test Data Source. You should get the message TESTS COMPLETED SUCCESSFULLY. If you dont get this message, review your steps and verify the added authentication credentials. 11.Click OK until you can close the Administrative Tools window.
To define a connection in Universe Designer

1. In the Universe Parameters dialog box, verify that the Definition tab is selected. 2. Click New.
37
Note: You can also create a new connection from the Connections dialog box. Select Tools Connections and click the Add button in the Connections list. The Welcome page of the Connection Wizard appears. 3. Click Next. The Database Middleware Selection page appears. It lists the database and middleware that correspond to your data access driver key. 4. Select the connection type from the Type list box. Note: In order to deploy a universe to the BusinessObjects repository, you must define this connection type as Secured. 5. Define a name for the connection. You can enter up to 35 characters. 6. Expand the + box for the target database for the connection. The supported middleware for that database appears in the expanded area. 7. Expand the + box for the target middleware for the connection. The data access driver for the middleware appears. 8. Select a driver name and click Next. The Login Parameters page appears. 9. Select the required authentication mode. 10.In the User name and Password field enter the database login credentials. 11.In the Data source name field, select the appropriate data source for the database you are connecting to. 12.Once you have entered this information, click Next. 13.In the Configuration Parameters page, apply the required parameters or keep the default values selected. Click Next. 14.In the Custom Parameters page, apply the required parameters or keep the default values selected. Click Finish. 15.In the Wizard Connection dialog box, click the Test button to test the connection. If the connection is valid, a message dialog box appears indicating that the connection is correct. If you receive an error message, check that you entered all the parameters correctly. If the error persists, refer to the section of your RDBMS documentation relating to error messages. 16.Click Finish to exit the wizard. If you created the connection from the Universe Parameters dialog box, the new connection is listed in the connection drop-down list.
38
Note: Avoid creating two different secured connections with the same name. For example, one connection named "Status" and the other named "status". This may lead to a conflict in the repository.
More about connection types

The connection type determines who can use the connection to access data. You can create three types of connections with Universe Designer: personal, shared, and secured.
Personal connections
Use personal connections to restrict data access to the universe creator and the computer on which it was created. Using a personal connection, you have access to personal data on a local machine. You do not use personal connections to distribute universes.
Shared connections
Allow access to data for users. These connections are unsecured. Shared connections can be useful in a universe testing environment.
Secured connections
Secured connections centralize and control access to data. They are the safest type of connection. Use secured connections to protect access to sensitive data. You can create secured connections with Universe Designer. Connections are stored in the BusinessObjects repository. These can be shared with other designers with the appropriate privileges. You must use secured connections if you want to distribute universes through the BusinessObjects repository. Secured connections can be used and updated at any time. To define a secured connection you must be connected to the BusinessObjects repository.
Viewing, modifying, and deleting available connections

You can view all available stored connections in the Connections List . Using the Wizard Connection, you can edit existing connections, or create new ones. Note: You cannot modify the name of an existing connection. Created connections can be removed from the Connections List.
To view available connections

1. Select Tools Connections.
39
The Wizard Connection dialog box appears with the Connections List page. This list displays all the connections available to the designer, regardless of the universes. The current universe may be based on a SQL Server database, but you can add a new connection to an Oracle database in this wizard. You can add, delete and edit existing connections from this dialog box.
2. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
To edit a connection
1. Click Tools Connections. The Wizard Connection dialog box appears. 2. Select the connection that requires editing from the list of available connections. 3. Click Edit. The Login Parameters page for the connection appears. 4. Modify the login parameters or select a different data source for the connection. 5. Click Next. 6. Modify the configuration parameters as required, and click Next. 7. Modify the custom parameters as required, and click Finish. 8. Click the Test button to verify the modified connection. 9. Click Finish to apply the changes to the connection.
40
To delete a connection
1. Click Tools Connections. The Wizard Connection dialog box appears. 2. Select the connection you want to delete from the list of available connections. 3. Click the Remove button. A confirmation dialog box appears. 4. Click Yes. The connection is removed from the list.
Creating a new universe

Before you can build a universe, you must first create a new universe file. You save the new universe as a .unv file. The new universe contains no classes and objects. You create these during the universe development process by designing a table schema and then creating objects that map to database structures.
To begin creating a new universe

1. In Universe Designer, select New from the File menu. The Universe Parameters dialog box displays:
41
Note: Make sure the Universe Parameters dialog box displays with the Definition tab active. 2. In the Name field, enter a name for the universe. 3. In the Description field, enter a brief description for the universe. This is used as a help description for the end user. It needs to accurately describe the content of the universe using terminology the end user will easily understand. 4. In the Connection field, select or define the data source connection. 5. Select File Save from the menu bar. 6. Provide a name for the file. The universe file is saved as a .unv file.
Defining universe parameters

To be able to start building the universe structure, you must first define a number of parameters, such as the parameters to be used to connect to the data source. Universe parameters are definitions and restrictions that you define for a universe. These parameters: Identify the universe. Identify the database connection. Specify the type of queries that can be run using the universe. Set the controls on the use of system resources. An important element of this setup process is selecting the kind of database connection you will use. Select an existing connection or create a new one. The other parameters can be set at this point but are better done at a later point in the universe building process.
Identifying the universe

Each universe is identified by the following parameters:
Identifier Used by
File name
File system, Business Objects end-user querying tools to reference the universe Business Objects end-user querying tools Business Objects end-user querying tools
Long name Description
42
Identifier
Used by
Unique system identifier
Central Management Server
File names
A file name is created when you save the universe. The length of the name is dependent on your operating system maximum. Windows allows approximately 156 characters. The file name extension is .unv. The local file system is the server on which Universe Designer is installed. Your universes are saved by default in the universes folder in your user profile path as follows:
\\Documents and Settings\<user>\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 12.0\Universes\<universe>.unv
Note: Do not change the universe file name after reports have been created on that universe or the report files will no longer point to the universe.
Long names
The universe long name is set in the Name field on the Definition tab. You can enter up to 200 characters and there are no character restrictions.
Universe descriptions
The universe description is an optional field. Information in this field can provide useful details about the universes role and is viewable by end users.
Unique system identifiers

The unique system identifier is assigned by the Central Management System (CMS). This occurs when the universe is exported to the repository for the first time.
Universe parameters
Universe parameters are definitions and restrictions that you define for a universe. Universe Designer allows designers to define several different parameters using the different tabs available in the Universe Parameters dialog box.
Note: For more detailed reference information about these parameters, refer to Chapter 2 - Doing Basic Operations, Setting Universe Parameters in the Business Objects XI 3.0 Designers Guide.
Universe Parameters dialog box

There are seven tabs on the Universe Parameters dialog box that allow you to change different parameters. This table provides a quick snapshot of the different tabs:
43
Parameter
Description
Definition
Universe name, description, connection parameters, and information. These parameters identify the universe. Version and revision information, designer comments, and universe statistics. Strategies used by the universe. A strategy is a script used to extract structural information from a database. Limitations set for the use of system resources. Types of queries that the end user is allowed to run. Settings defined for linked universes. SQL parameters that can be dynamically configured.
Summary
Strategies
Controls
SQL
Links
Parameter
44
Definition tab
On the Definition tab you can set the universe name and a meaningful description. There is no character limitation. End users will see these in their Business Objects querying tool when they select the universe. The Connection field displays the connection name defined against the database. Business Objects XI 3.0, allows designers to create universes based on stored procedures. Select the Click here to choose stored procedure universe option to connect to stored procedures available in the data source. The available stored procedures are displayed in the Table Browser.
45
Summary tab
The Summary tab displays universe administration information.

Information Description
Created
Universe creation date and the name of the creator. Date of last modification and the name of the modifier. Revision number indicates the number of times the universe has been exported to the repository. Information about the universe for yourself or another designer. This information is only available in Universe Designer. Includes information about the universe for users in the Description field on the Identification page. You can print the text contained in this box, which means that you can use it to track changes made to the universe and by whom, if you so desire.
Modified
Revision
Comments
46
Information
Description
Statistics
List of the number of classes, objects, tables, aliases, joins, contexts, and hierarchies contained in the universe.
Strategies tab
A strategy is a script that automatically extracts structural information from a database or flat file. Default strategies have two principle roles: Automatic join and cardinality detection Automatic class, object, and join creation Strategies are useful if you want to automate the detection and creation of structures in your universe based on the SQL structures in the database. Strategies that automate the creation of universe structures are not necessarily an essential part of universe design and creation. They are useful if you are creating a universe quickly, and you want to use metadata information that already exists in a database or database design tool. However, if you are building a universe by creating objects and joins that are based on relationships that come directly from a user needs analysis, then you will probably not use the automatic creation possibilities that this tab offers. Built-in strategies are the default strategies that are shipped with Universe Designer. You can select them by clicking the drop-down menus in this strategies parameters tab. There are built-in strategies for all supported databases, which cannot be modified. You can, however, create custom strategies, which are known as external strategies. Built-in strategies appear by default before external strategies in the drop-down lists.
47
Note: The built-in strategies for detecting joins will only select on matching column names, ignoring all other column names, and may create unnecessary joins.
Controls tab
On the Controls tab, you can limit the result size and execution times for queries that use this universe. The Limit execution time option allows you to restrict the execution time for any query generated via the universe for queries generating more than one SQL statement. The time limit that you specify for query execution is the total execution time for a query. If the query contains multiple SQL statements, then each statement is given an execution time equal to the total query execution time divided by the number of statements. The result is that each statement in the query has the same execution time. If one statement requires a lot more time than others to run, it may not complete as its execution time will not correspond to its allotted execution time within the query. When you specify an execution time limit for multiple SQL statements, you need to take into account the normal execution time of the single statement that takes the longest time to run, and multiply this value by the number of statements in the query. If you set the Warn if cost estimate exceeds option, a message informs the user if the query is likely to take more than the number of minutes you specify here. This mechanism is dependent on whether the database statistics are up-to-date.
48
SQL tab
You can set controls on the types of queries that end users can build in Business Objects querying tools. You can indicate controls for the following areas of query generation: Use of subqueries Use of operators and operands in individual queries Generation of multiple SQL statements Selection of multiple contexts Prevent or warn about the occurrence of a Cartesian product
Note: The Multiple SQL statements for each measure option is selected by default. Accepting this default value could potentially impact query performance. This issue will be discussed in more detail in later lessons.
49
Links tab
Links specify dynamic links between universes related to the same database. This allows a universe and its content to be embedded in another universe. Embedding universes optimizes maintenance where some objects are used in many universes.
Note: Universes need to be exported to the repository before linking.
Parameters tab
50
In Universe Designer, you can configure certain SQL parameters that are common to most databases to optimize the SQL generated. These parameters apply only to the active universe, and are saved in the .unv file.
Activity: Creating a new universe and defining its connection

Objective
Create a new universe and define its connection to the database.
Instructions
1. Create an ODBC DSN for SQL Server 2005 called MotorsDSN. 2. Start a Universe Designer session and log on. 3. Create a new universe and define the following parameters: Name = Motors Description = This universe provides information on the Prestige Motor Cars
Database for Showrooms, Models sold, Rental and Sales Business
Connection = Motors_conn Tip: Use the New Connection Wizard to create the Motors connection against the SQL Server 2005 Motors database. 4. Save the new Motors universe. The universe is saved in the local universe directory. 5. Create another new universe and define the following parameters: Name = Staff Description = This universe provides information on the personnel of Prestige
Cars
Connection: Motors_conn Note: Use the same connection that you used in Step 5, that is, Motors_conn against the SQL Server 2005 Motors database. 6. Save the Staff universe.
51
Quiz: Creating the course universe

1. Information about universe administration appears on the Universe Parameters dialog box. Under which tab can you find this information? 2. Can a universe and its content be embedded in another universe? 3. If you want to distribute the completed universe to the user population using the BusinessObjects repository, which type of connection should you use?
52
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Describe the course database and universe Create the course universes
53
54
Lesson 3
Building the Universe Structure

Lesson introduction
This lesson describes how to add tables to the universe structure and how to customize the way you work with tables. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Populate the universe structure Define joins in a universe
Building the Universe StructureLearners Guide
55
Populating the universe structure

A schema is a graphical representation of a database structure. In Universe Designer you create a schema for the part of the database that your universe represents. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Design a schema Add tables in the Structure pane Organize your view of tables
Designing a schema
The schema contains tables and joins. Objects are mapped to columns in tables that end users use to create reports. The joins link the tables so that the correct data is returned for queries that are run on multiple tables. Design the schema in the Structure pane by selecting tables from the target database using the Table Browser. You create joins to link the tables. When you have designed the schema for your universe, you can verify the schema using an automatic integrity check. Good schema design is essential to good universe design. Populate the schema with tables based on the columns that correspond to the objects that end users need to create reports. Define the objects according to a user needs analysis. Examine the database for tables that allow you to create these necessary objects.
Schema design and the universe creation process

After the initial schema design in the first implementation phase of the Universe Development Cycle, you will start using Universe Designer to build your universe.
Adding tables
The Structure pane of the Universe Designer interface is used to create a visual representation of the physical data structure to which the universe is mapped. When you create a new universe, the structure is empty and you need to populate it with the appropriate tables. Database tables are placed in the structure using the Table Browser, which provides a list of tables in the database. The Table Browser is an independent window that shows a tree view of the tables and columns in your target database. Use the Table Browser to view and select tables in your database that
56
you want to insert into your schema. Expand the + box next to a table name to display the columns for the table.
To open the Table Browser

The Table Browser is not visible by default. You must activate the Table Browser when you want to add tables to the Structure pane. You can activate the Table Browser using any of the methods listed below.
Note: A universe file has to be open in Universe Designer to be able to access the Table Browser.
1. You can open the Table Browser using one of the following methods: Click the Table Browser button on the Editing toolbar. Double-click the background area of the Structure pane. Select Insert Tables from the menu bar. Right-click the Structure pane and choose Tables from the drop-down menu. The Table Browser displays:
From the Table Browser you can select tables to include in the universe schema. You can insert a single table or multiple tables simultaneously.
To insert a single table

1. You can use the following methods to insert a single table: In the Table Browser, click a table and drag it into the Structure pane.
57
In the Table Browser double-click a table. In the Table Browser click a table, and click Insert. The table appears in the Structure pane.
To insert multiple tables

1. In the Table Browser, hold the Shift key while you click the first table and last table to select a continuous block of tables. Multiple tables are selected. Note: The Ctrl key can also be used here to select multiple tables. Tip: It is a good practice to insert only a few tables together at one time. This makes the schema more manageable when making further adjustments and adding joins. 2. Use one of the following methods to add the tables to the Structure pane: Click Insert Drag and drop the selected tables in the Structure pane. Each table including all of its columns appears in the Structure pane. In the Table Browser, any table that you insert in the universe displays with a check mark beside its name. Note: Columns cannot be selectively chosen. When you select a table, all columns will be included in the structure.
To view data from the Table Browser

You can use the Table Browser to view the data contained in a table, or in an individual column. 1. Expand a table +box in the Table Browser and right-click a column or the entire table. 2. Select View Table Values from the right-click menu. A dialog box appears listing the data contained in the table or column.
58
Manipulating tables in the universe structure

When a table has been placed in the Structure pane, it shows the names of the columns it contains.
You can use various commands to manipulate tables within the Structure pane. These are described in the sections that follow. You can move, copy, or delete tables in the Structure pane, as well as organize and change the table display.
To select tables
Usually the first step in moving, copying, or deleting tables is to select them. 1. To select a single table, click the table header. 2. To select several tables, press Ctrl and click the table header of each table you want to select in turn. 3. To select all tables, press Ctrl + A or choose Edit Select All from the menu bar. Tip: You can also select multiple tables by: clicking on the Structure pane holding the left mouse button down dragging the mouse across the tables you want to select A line appears when you do this and boxes in your selection.
59
4. To deselect a table, click the background of the Structure pane.
To move tables
1. Select the tables you want to move. 2. Drag the tables to a new position.
To delete tables
1. Select the tables you want to delete. 2. Press the Delete key.
To organize your tables

There are several options that enable you to obtain a better view of your tables: 1. Use drag and drop to move the tables around the Structure pane. 2. Click the Arrange Tables button to arrange tables horizontally. 3. Select from the Zoom drop-down list to minimize or magnify the Structure pane. 4. Double-click the table header in the Structure pane to change the table display.
60
To change a table display

You can change tables so that they display all columns of a table, the table name only, or the primary and secondary keys (join columns) only. 1. There are three options to change a table display: Select View Change Table Display from the menu bar. Select Ctrl + T. Double-click the table header. Table name displays:
2. If you select View Change Table Display , Ctrl+T, or double-click a second time, only the Join columns will display in the table. Join columns only display:
If you repeat one of those actions a third time, the original table view appears again.
To view table values

You can view the data for a database table or column in the same way as in the Table Browser. 1. Right-click the header of the table whose values you want to see. The following menu displays:
61
2. From the menu, choose Table Values.
3. Click Close.
Activity: Populating the universe structure

Objective
Insert tables into the Motors universe.
Instructions
1. Insert the tables listed below into your blank Motors universe. CLIENT COLOUR COUNTRY
62
FINANCE_PERIOD MAKER MODEL REGION SALE SALES_PRICE_RANGE SALE_MODEL SHOWROOM STYLE
2. Order the tables so that they are laid out in the same way as the illustration below.
3. Save the changes to the universe.
63
Defining joins in a universe

After you have inserted more than one table in the schema, you need to create joins between related tables. A join is a condition that restricts the result set of a multi-relational query. Joins are as important as tables in a schema because they allow you to combine data from multiple tables in a meaningful way. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand why you need joins in the universe structure Create joins Set join cardinalities Explain the join types View join expressions using List Mode Check the integrity of the universe structure and its joins
About joins and SQL WHERE clauses

SQL specifies a join implicitly in a WHERE clause through a reference to the matching or common columns of the tables. Normally there is one WHERE clause for each pair of tables being joined. For example, if four tables are being combined, three WHERE conditions are necessary. In BusinessObjects querying tools, if you run a query that involves inferring a SELECT statement on two tables that have not been joined in the universe structure, the resulting report produces a Cartesian product, that is, an illogical question resulting in illogical data, as illustrated below. In other words, it outputs a report that joins every column in the first table to every column in the second table. To prevent this from happening, you need to specify a join between the tables in the Structure pane in Universe Designer.
64
Creating joins
You have several approaches to creating joins in Universe Designer: Defining joins manually in the schema Defining join properties directly in the Edit Join dialog box Using the Join SQL Editor to specify the join expression Each of these approaches is described in detail below.
Defining joins manually in the schema

You can graphically create individual joins between tables by using the mouse to drag a line from a column in one table to a matching column in another table.
Creating the join by defining properties

You can also create a join by directly defining the join properties in the Edit Join dialog box.
To create a join by tracing manually

1. Click on any blank area of the Structure pane to deselect all tables. 2. Position the pointer over a column that you want to be one end of a join. The pointer appears as a hand symbol. 3. Click and hold down the left mouse button. The column is highlighted. 4. Drag the mouse to the column in another table that you want to be the other end of the join. As you drag, the pointer changes into a pencil symbol.
5. Position the pencil symbol over the target column. The target column is highlighted. 6. Release the mouse button. The join between the two tables is created. Note that the definition of the join appears in the Formula toolbar. 7. Double-click the new join. The Edit Join dialog box appears showing the join properties.
65
Note: The properties that you can set for a join, including cardinality and join type, are described later in this lesson. The Edit Join dialog box displays the default properties of the join. 8. Enter and select properties for the join. 9. Click OK to close the Edit Join dialog box.
To create a join using the Edit Join dialog box

1. Select Insert Join from the menu, or click the Insert join button. The Edit Join dialog box appears. 2. Select a table from the Table1 drop-down list. The columns for the selected table appear in the list box under the table name. 3. Click the name of the column that you want to be at one end of the new join. 4. Select a table from the Table2 drop-down list box. The columns for the selected table appear in the list box under the table name. 5. Click the name of the column that you want to be at the other end of the new join. The join expression is dynamically built in the zones below and can be modified as necessary. Note: The properties that you can set for this join, including the join operator, cardinality, and join type are described later in this lesson.
66
6. Click OK. The new join appears in the schema, linking the two tables and columns that you specified in the Edit Join dialog box. Note: Another method for inserting a join is to click the first table in the Structure pane, hold down the Ctrl key, click the other table, and then click Insert Join. The two tables are automatically entered in the Edit Join box and you can edit the join properties as required.
About join properties

You can define the following properties for a join.
Property Description Table at the left end of the join. Columns are listed for the table selected in the drop-down list. Table at the right side of the join. Columns are listed for the table selected in the drop-down list. Operator that defines how the tables are joined. The operators available to a join are described in the following section. When selected, determines which table contains unmatched data in an outer join relationship. Outer joins are described fully in the following section. When selected, allows you to define the cardinality for the join. Defining and using cardinalities is described in the following section. Defines the join as a shortcut join. Shortcut joins are described in the following section. WHERE clause used to restrict the data that is returned when the two joined tables are included in a query. This clause can be edited as necessary.
Table1 Table2
Operator
Outer Join
Cardinality
Shortcut Join
Expression
Join operators
You can select an operator for a join from the drop-down list between the Table1 and Table2 boxes. The operator allows you to define the restriction that the join uses to match data between the joined columns. You can select the following operators for a join:
Operator Description
equal to
67
Operator
Description
!= > < >= <= Between Complex
not equal to greater than less than greater than or equal to less than or equal to between (theta joins) complex relationship
Editing the join expression

Use the Edit Join dialog box to define and edit join properties. You can also access the Join SQL editor to edit join syntax directly from this dialog box. The Edit Join dialog box also has two features available that allow you to edit and verify the join syntax:
Edit
The Edit button opens an SQL editor. Use this graphic editor to modify the syntax for tables, columns, operators, and functions used in the join.
Parse
The Parse button starts a parsing function that verifies the SQL syntax of the join expression. If the parse is successful, you receive a result is OK message. If Universe Designer encounters an error, you receive an error message indicating the source of the problem.
Using the Join SQL editor

You can use a graphical editor to directly modify the SQL expression for a join. You access this editor from the Edit Join dialog box by clicking the Edit button.
68
To modify a join using the Join SQL editor

1. Double-click a join in the Structure pane, or click a join and select Edit Join. The Edit Join dialog box appears. 2. Below the Expression text box, click the Edit... button. The Join SQL Definition dialog box appears. The SQL expression for the join appears in the text box.
3. Modify the SQL syntax as required. You can use the following editing features to modify or add SQL syntax:
If you want to... Change a column at either join end Then... Expand the table + box in the Tables and Columns box and double-click on a new column name. Double-click an operator in the Operators box. Expand a function family + box and double-click on a new function, or edit the SQL text directly.
Change an operator used by the join Use a function in the join
The column, operator, or function appears in the join definition. 4. Click OK to validate your changes. 5. Verify that the join expression in the Expression text box has been modified. 6. Click OK to close the Edit Join dialog box.
69
Detecting joins
Joins can also be created automatically. This procedure can be applied to multiple tables or, if none are selected, all tables in the Structure pane.
Note: The automatic detection of joins assumes that all columns with matching names are to be joined, and other columns will be ignored. This may not be appropriate, in which case it is better to insert the joins manually.
To detect joins automatically

1. Click the table you want to select joins for. Note: You can select multiple tables by pressing the Shift key, and clicking each table. You can also select all tables in a zone by clicking in an empty space, and dragging the cursor to define a rectangular zone that includes any number of tables. 2. To detect the joins automatically: Select Tools Automated Detection Detect Joins. Click the Detect Joins button from the Editing toolbar. A Candidate Joins dialog box displays listing all the joins detected. 3. Click the join or joins you want to accept in the Candidate Joins dialog box. Note: You can accept and insert several joins at the same time using Shift-click or Ctrl-click. 4. Click Insert. The join or joins are inserted in the Structure pane. 5. Click Close.
Setting join cardinalities

Setting cardinality is a critical step in universe development. Cardinality is the term that refers to the relationship between two tables based on a join, specifically how many rows in one table will match those in the other. Whether or not cardinality is defined or how it is defined does not directly impact the SQL that is inferred in universe queries. Rather, a universe designer defines cardinality to benefit from powerful assistance from the Universe Designer resolving-loops tool.
About cardinality
Cardinality is the means by which Universe Designer identifies the relationships between tables in the universe structure. The cardinality can be: one-to-one (1-1) one-to-many (1-N)
70
many-to-one (N1) many-to-many (N-N) For example, a country can have many regions, so the relationship between a Country and a Region table is 1-N. Universe Designer uses cardinality to detect and resolve loops.
Note: It is very important that all cardinalities are set correctly for loop and context detection. This will be discussed in more detail later in this course.
You can choose to set cardinality manually or by using an automatic detection tool.
Setting cardinality manually or with the automatic detection tool

Cardinality in universe design is based on a logical algorithm using a physical count. The automatic detection tool only works properly if the database is populated with realistic data in a completely normalized structure (for example, no multiple lookup tables or other tricks that are sometimes applied by database administrators). Also, it is important to understand that because the detection tool runs three queries on every join, it can take a long time to complete the detection method. The cardinality detection tool works by running the following queries: A count of the rows in each of the two tables that are joined (two queries) A count of the rows output when applying a query with the join specified in the WHERE clause (one query) For these reasons, you are strongly advised to apply cardinality manually for efficiency and accuracy. When you set cardinalities manually, you must consider each individual join. This helps you to become aware of potential join path problems in your schema. You may not find these problems if you only select automatically detected cardinalities; for example, isolated one-to-one joins at the end of a join path, or excessive primary keys where not all columns are required to ensure uniqueness.
To set cardinality manually

It is recommended that you systematically set the join cardinality when you first create a join, using the following manual method. 1. Double-click a join, or click a join and select Edit Properties.
71
The Edit Join dialog box appears with the join expression already defined. In the center of the dialog box is the Cardinality zone.
2. To set the cardinality manually, click the appropriate 1 and N option buttons in the Cardinality zone. Note: 1 = one end of join; N = Many end of join. Tip: As you click the different options in the Cardinality zone, a message appears below the buttons to describe the relationship between the tables, based on the settings you select. 3. Select the 1 or N radio button for Table1. 4. Select the 1 or N radio button for Table2.
72
5. Click OK to accept your changes and close the Edit Join dialog box.
Displaying cardinalities
You can display cardinalities in the Structure pane using the following symbols:
Cardinality symbol Example Description
Arrow
Arrow indicates the onedirection of the join. If cardinality is 1,1 then an arrow head is shown at each join end.
Arity
Crows foot indicates the many end of the join. If cardinality is 1,1, then a straight line is shown.
73
Cardinality symbol
Example
Description
1,N
Cardinality is shown as a ratio at each end of the join.
To display cardinalities
1. Select Tools Options from the menu bar. 2. The Options dialog box opens to the General page. 3. Click the Graphics tab. The Graphics page appears.
4. Click the Arrow, Arity, or 1,n option. 5. Click OK to save the changes.
74
Detecting cardinality automatically

You can set Universe Designer to detect cardinality automatically as you insert joins, however it is recommended that you use the manual method described previously, to ensure accurate results. You can detect cardinality for a single join by selecting that join and clicking the Detect Cardinalities icon in the Editing toolbar. This is due to the fact that, if the database is large, running the cardinality detection queries for every join can take considerable time.
How is cardinality detected?

To detect the cardinality of a join between two tables, the following three queries are run:
SELECT count (*) FROM table1, table2 WHERE table1.column = table2.column SELECT count (*) FROM table1 SELECT count (*) FROM table2.
The results of the three queries are then compared in an attempt to determine which query is the end of the join with one entity and which is the end with many (if there is one).
To detect cardinality on a single join

Cardinality can be detected on a single join using one of two methods. 1. Using the Edit Join dialog box: a. Double-click the join in the Structure pane to open the Edit Join dialog box. b. In the Cardinality zone of the Edit Join dialog box, click the Detect button. c. Check the cardinality statement to make sure that the one-to-many relationship proposed makes logical sense. d. Click OK to accept the proposed cardinality and close the Edit Join dialog box. In the Structure pane, Universe Designer applies the cardinality symbol to the appropriate end of the join, based on the cardinality proposed by the detection tool. 2. Using the Detect Cardinality button: a. Select the join. b. Click the Detect Cardinalities button. The automatic tool detects the cardinality of the join and applies the arity symbol to the appropriate end of the join. c. Check the arity symbols displayed between the tables to make sure that the one-to-many relationship proposed makes logical sense. d. Edit the cardinality proposed in the Edit Join dialog box if necessary.
75
Detect cardinality for all joins

You can use the Universe Designer feature Detect Cardinalities to automatically detect all joins in the schema. When using automatic cardinality detection, cardinalities are implemented automatically on detection. You should use automatic cardinality detection appropriately. It can be very useful to quickly get all the cardinalities detected in the schema, however, there are a number of structural problems inherent in many relational databases which can lead to incorrect cardinality detection.
To detect cardinality for all joins

You can also detect cardinality all at the same time, although this is not a recommended procedure to ensure accurate results. 1. Click the Structure pane background to ensure no join is selected. 2. Click the Check Cardinality button on the toolbar. Note: Cardinality is detected by automatically running three subsequent queries at the target database per join. You are therefore advised to avoid automatic detection of cardinalities on large databases. Use the manual method whenever cardinality is known. A message appears.
Universe Designer requests confirmation because executing the detection tool takes a long time if it is being applied to a large database. 3. If you are sure you want to use the automatic detection tool, click OK to detect the cardinalities.
76
The system inserts the cardinality symbols on the many ends of the joins.
Universe Designer offers yet another method for detecting cardinalities automatically: 1. Select Tools Options from the menu bar. 2. 3. 4. Click the Database tab. Select the Detect cardinalities in joins check box. Click OK.
Best practices for setting join cardinality

As mentioned previously, there are three reasons why using the automatic detection tool to set join cardinalities is not recommended: Cardinality is based on logic. It is logical that every country has more than one region; it is not logical that a region may have more than one country. The automatic detection tool uses physical cardinality, and runs a physical count on the values in both columns being joined. You may get incorrect results if the physical count does not return the same result as a logical analysis of the data. The algorithm used by the automatic detection tool assumes that you have sufficient quantity of data in both tables to be representative in ratio to the database in a live environment. If you are designing against a test database, for example, with only a representative sampling of data, you could receive an incorrect answer because the tool runs a physical count. The automatic detection tool runs three subsequent queries against the target database per join. You are, therefore, advised to avoid automatic detection of cardinalities on large databases.
77
Join types
Join Type Description
Link tables based on the equality between the values in the column of one table and the values in the column of another. Because the same column is present in both tables, the join synchronizes the two tables.
Equi-join (default) (includes the complex equi-join)
You can also create complex equi-joins, where one join links multiple columns between two tables. Equi-join is the join type created by default between two tables.
Link two tables, one of which has rows that may not match those in the common column of the other table. Link tables based on a relationship other than equality between two columns, as in for example, a BETWEEN join. Join providing an alternate path between two tables, bypassing intermediate tables, leading to the same result regardless of direction. Optimizes query time by cutting long join paths as short as possible. Single-table join used to set a restriction on the table.
Outer join
Theta join (conditional join)
Shortcut join
Self-restricting join
Equi-joins
An equi-join is a restriction that conforms to the syntax set out below:
Table1.column_a = Table2.column_a
An equi-join is a join based on column values between two tables. In a normalized database, the columns used in an equi-join are often the primary key from one table and the foreign key in the other. A primary key of a relational table uniquely identifies each record in the table. Primary keys may consist of a single attribute or multiple attributes in combination. A foreign key is a field in a relational table that matches the primary key column of another table. When a SELECT statement is run, the SELECT and FROM clauses are now properly defined and prevent a Cartesian product.
78
Outer joins
An outer join is a join that links two tables, one of which has rows that may not match those in the common column of the other table. You define an outer join by specifying which table is the outer table in the original equi-join. The outer table contains the column for which you want to return all values, even if they are unmatched. You specify the outer table from the Edit Join dialog box for the selected join.
For instance, the example illustrated above shows the Country and Region tables from a database. Note that there are three different values in the primary key of the Country table and only two distinct values in the corresponding foreign key of the Region table. If you were to apply an equi-join, the result set of a query would only show information on US and UK. However, you may wish to show all three countries irrespective of equivalent foreign key values in the Region table. To achieve this, use an outer join. In specifying an outer join in a standard SQL SELECT statement, you are required to identify which of the two tables is the outer. Using straight SQL (as opposed to generating it using a universe), the problem is that different RDBMS define outer differently and the syntax of the statement also differs. For example, depending on the underlying RDBMS, the outer join may be on the left or right.
79
In a universe, the outer join is always placed on the table that contains all the data. That is, on Country in the example above. To do this, place a check against the table that contains all the data in the Edit Join dialog box.
Tip: A good way to find out where to place your outer join is by reading the description that shows up in the Cardinality zone. If you select the outer join check box for Country the description reads:
Each Country has ZERO or more Regions, AND each Region has one and only one Country. When you check the outer join box for the Country table, you will retrieve all countries whether they have a region or not.
Once this is done, the correct outer join is inferred when used in the generated query, and the syntax is correctly inferred for the appropriate RDBMS (assuming you have the correct SQL inference driver). An outer join is shown by a small circle on the join line in the universe structure at the end that points to the table that may have missing values.
Best Practice with Outer Joins

It is recommended that outer joins be placed at the end of the flow of data, otherwise ambiguous outer join errors may occur. Potentially, this could cause the SQL to try to match on the equality of a NULL value, which it cannot do. If you do place outer joins in the middle of a table path, the subsequent joins in the path may also have to be made outer to avoid errors.
80
Always remember that outer joins may cause the query to run slower than a query with no outer joins. This problem can be resolved by using aliases and aggregate aware.
Theta joins
A theta join is a between-type join that links tables based on a relationship other than equality between two columns. It is used to demonstrate ranges, such as start date and end date, or minimum and maximum. A theta join can use any operator other than the equal operator.
For instance, there is a table in the Motors database called Sales_Price_Range. This contains a number of rows defining fixed price ranges by which you may wish to analyze data as illustrated above. To do this, the table needs to be included in the universe structure and a join set. The obvious table to join it to is the Model table which includes the price of a model. However, there is no common column between the Sales_Price_Range and Model tables so an equi-join cannot be used. Instead you need to infer that a join exists where the value in a row of the Model_Price column in the Model table is between the values in a row for the Price_Range_Min and Price_Range_Max columns of the Sales_Price_Range table.
To create a theta join

To create a theta join using range columns:
1. Click the Insert Join button, or select Insert Join. The Edit Join dialog box appears. 2. Select a table from the Table1 drop-down list. The columns for the selected table appear in the list under the table name. 3. Click the column you want to join. 4. Select the a table from the Table2 drop-down list.
81
The columns for the selected table appear in the list under the table name. 5. Press and hold down the Ctrl key and click two columns from the Table2 column list box.
Note: The operand changes to Between automatically, and indicates that the join expression is dynamically built as a Between syntax. 6. Click the Parse button to test for the validity of the join. If you receive an error message, check to see that you have correctly selected the columns. 7. Set the correct cardinality. 8. Click OK. The theta join now appears between the two selected tables.
Shortcut joins
A common use of shortcut joins is to link a shared lookup table to another table further along a join path. The join path is comprised of several different tables in the same context. A shortcut join is a join that provides an alternate path between two tables. It improves the performance of a query by not taking into account intermediate tables, and shortening a normally longer join path. In such a case, the shortcut join is only effective when the value being looked up has been denormalized to lower levels in a hierarchy of tables so the same value exists at all the levels being joined.
82
Self-restricting joins
A self-restricting join is not really a join at all, but a self-restriction on a single table, usually a transaction table. You can use a self-restricting join to restrict the results returned by a table using a fixed value.
The table in the example above contains rows of data for cars both sold and rented. The sale type column is used as a flag to indicate the type of transaction. Without the self-restricting join, the results set of the query would produce rows where the sale type column is equal to either car sales ('S') or car rental ('R'). With the self-restricting join expression set to sale type equal to S, any object based on the table or joins passing through that table would produce query results covering only car sales.
To create a self-restricting join

1. Use one of the following methods to insert a join: Click on the Insert Join button. Select Insert Join. The Edit Join dialog box appears. 2. Select the table from the Table1 drop-down list. Select the table that you want to set the self-restricting join against from the Table1 dropdown list box. The columns for the selected table appear in the list under the table name. 3. Click the column that you want to use to define the restriction from the column drop-down list box. 4. From the Table2 drop-down list, select the same table that you selected from the Table1 drop-down list box. 5. Click the same column that you selected in the Table1 column list box. The expression for the join appears in the Expression text box.
83
6. Replace the operand value in the join expression with the restriction value that you want to set on the join column. For example, if you want to restrict the returned values from the sale type column to car sales values only, you replace SALE_TYPE after the = sign with 'S' as shown below: Tip: This can also be done directly in the Expression field. Note: It is recommend that you set the cardinality of a self-restricting join to 1:1. Otherwise, when running detect contexts, you will get an error that not all cardinalities have been detected.
7. Click OK The self-restricting join now appears as an unconnected join line.
You can view the join expression underlying a join line or all the join expressions for a table using List Mode as well as the Edit Joins dialog box.
84
List Mode
You can use List Mode to list the tables, joins, and contexts used in the active universe. In List Mode, Universe Designer adds three panes above the display of the Structure pane; tables, joins, and contexts. You can view the join expression underlying a join line or all join expressions for a table using List Mode as well as the Edit Joins dialog box.
To use List Mode

1. Click the View List Mode button. After List Mode opens, you can view tables and join information and expressions in various ways. For example:
2. Click a join in the graphical Structure pane. The expression for the join is highlighted in the Joins pane in the List Mode. 3. Click a table in the Tables pane of List Mode, and click the arrow pointing to the Joins pane. Only the joins for the selected table are shown in the Joins pane. 4. Clear the highlighted arrow to view all the joins and tables again. 5. Click the View List Mode button to return to normal view.
85
Note: Make sure you clear any arrows in List Mode before returning to normal view. The restricted view of tables could interfere with operations that you perform in normal view, such as detecting contexts.
Checking integrity
Use the Check Integrity option to detect any errors in the structure and joins of a universe. Be careful of checking cardinality automatically for all the reasons mentioned previously. As a general rule, never select the Check Cardinalities check box when you are checking the integrity of your universe.
To check the integrity of a universe

1. Click the Check Integrity button. The Integrity Check dialog box displays:
2. Select check boxes for components to be verified. 3. Clear check boxes for components not to be verified. 4. Click OK. Universe Designer checks the universe and displays the Integrity Check Results dialog box. If there are no errors, click OK. Otherwise, you need to return to your Structure pane and correct any errors as indicated in the Integrity Check Results dialog box. Note: Some divergences in integrity results are acceptable.
86
Activity: Defining joins in a universe

Objective
Insert joins between tables in the Motors universe and set cardinalities.
Instructions
1. Insert the following equi-join using the drag-and-drop technique: COUNTRY.COUNTRY_ID to REGION.COUNTRY_ID 2. Set the cardinality for the join manually in the Edit Join dialog box. 3. Insert the following equi-join using the Edit Join dialog box and set the cardinality. REGION.REGION_ID to CLIENT.REGION_ID 4. Insert the following theta join and set cardinality. MODEL.MODEL_PRICE BETWEEN SALE_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MIN AND
SALE_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MAX
5. Insert the following self-restricting join and set cardinality. SALE.SALE_TYPE ='S' 6. Check integrity for: Universe structure and joins 7. Notice the divergences found in the integrity check of the Motors universe. This is the result of having un-joined tables.
87
8. Check that the following joins and cardinalities are included in the universe structure. If not, add the remaining joins and cardinalities as specified in the table below:
Joins COUNTRY.COUNTRY_ID = REGION.COUNTRY_ID Type Equi Cardinality 1:N
REGION.REGION_ID = CLIENT.REGION_ID
Equi
1:N
MODEL.MODEL_PRICE BETWEEN SALE_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MIN AND SALE_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MAX
Theta
N:1
SALE.SALE_TYPE ='S'
Self
1:N
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID = SALE.CLIENT_ID
Equi
1:N
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID = SALE.SHOWROOM_ID
Equi
1:N
SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID = MODEL.MODEL_ID
Equi
N:1
MODEL.STYLE_ID = STYLE.STYLE_ID
Equi
N:1
MODEL.MAKER_ID = MAKER.MAKER_ID
Equi
N:1
SALE_MODEL.COLOUR_ID = COLOUR.COLOUR_ID
Equi
N:1
SALE.SALE_DATE BETWEEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_START AND FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_END
Theta
N:1
SALE.SALE_ID = SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID
Equi
1:N
9. Save the changes to the universe.
88
Quiz: Building the universe structure

1. A schema contains two elements. What are they? 2. What are three reasons why using the automatic detection routine for setting join cardinalities is not recommended? 3. What type of join is created by default between two tables?
89
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Populate the universe structure Define joins in a universe
90
Lesson 4
Creating Dimension Objects

Lesson introduction
This lesson describes how you can create classes and objects that are used by end users to run queries and create reports. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe classes and objects Create classes and objects
Creating Dimension ObjectsLearners Guide
91
Describing classes and objects

Because universes are made up of objects and classes, it is important to understand exactly how each of these elements is used. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe universe objects Describe universe classes
Classes
Within a universe, objects are grouped into classes. This is done to provide a structure for the universe and makes it easier for users to locate particular objects. The strategy most often employed is to group related dimension and detail objects into one class and place measure objects into a unique and single-measures class. This strategy can be extended by introducing subclasses to break down the objects into further subsets.
Each object in a universe must be contained within a class. You can create new classes and edit the properties of existing classes. Classes are represented as folders on a tree hierarchy in the Universe pane. In Universe Designer, you can qualify an object as being one of three types:
Object qualification Examples Description
Dimension
Focus of analysis in a query. A dimension maps to one or more columns or functions in the database that are key to a query. Provides descriptive data about a dimension. A detail is always attached to a dimension. It maps to one or more columns or functions in the database that provide detailed information related to a dimension.
Detail
92
Object qualification
Examples
Description
Measure
Contains aggregate functions that map to statistics in the database. These are the metrics by which you want to compare dimensions.
Dimension objects, where possible, tend to be organized hierarchically within a class. This is important if you intend to make use of default hierarchies for drilling. Detail objects are organized below their associated dimension objects. Note: Detail objects cannot be included in a drill path. Measure objects may be grouped in a separate class. This makes them easier for the user to find and also emphasizes the fact that they can be used with any dimension or detail object.
Note: Only dimension objects can be merged to synchronize queries from multiple data sources in end-user querying tools.
Objects
In Business Objects products, an object is a named component in a universe that represents a column or function in a database. In Universe Designer, objects appear as icons in the Universe pane. Each object represents a meaningful entity, fact, or calculation used in an end users business environment. The objects that you create in the Universe pane in Universe Designer are the objects that end users see and use in the Business Objects end-user querying tools. For example, in the Web Intelligence Rich Client Query Panel, users drag objects from the Data tab into the Result Objects pane to run queries and create reports that display the data returned by the query. Each object maps to a column or function in the target database, and when an object is selected in the Query Panel, the object infers a SELECT statement. When multiple objects are combined, a SELECT statement is run on the database which includes the SQL inferred by each object and a default WHERE clause.
93
As a universe designer, you use Universe Designer to create the objects that end users select to build and run their queries. You can also create objects for use only in Universe Designer, so that they are hidden in the Business Objects end-user querying tools.
94
Creating classes and objects

After defining classes and objects, the next step is to understand how to employ these elements. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Create a class Create objects Create classes and objects automatically Create classes and objects by copy and paste from another universe Edit object parameters Check integrity Test the objects in Web Intelligence Rich Client
Creating classes
There are two ways to create a class in the Universe pane: Manually defining a class. Automatically by dragging a table from the Structure pane into the Universe pane.
To create a class
In Universe Designer, classes are created in the Universe pane. If the Universe pane is not activated, it can be opened via View Universe Window. A class is a logical grouping of objects within a universe. It represents a category of objects. The name of a class should indicate the category of the objects that it contains. A class can be divided hierarchically into subclasses. 1. Open your universe file in Universe Designer, and in the Universe pane, click an existing class, below which you want the new class to appear. Note: If this is the first class you are creating, ignore this step. Note: If you create a class when an object within a class is highlighted, you will create a subclass within that class. 2. With the universe file open in Universe Designer, insert a new class. There are three ways you can insert a class: Click the Insert Class button from the Editing toolbar. Select Insert Class from the menu. Right-click in the Universe pane and choose Class from the right-click menu. 3. The Edit Properties dialog box displays. 4. In the Class Name field, enter a name.
95
5. In the Description field, enter a description of the class content. Use business language that is meaningful to the users in your description for when they review it. Avoid technical database language.
6. Click OK.
To manually create an object

1. Open your universe file in Universe Designer, and in the Universe pane, click the class in which you want the new object to be placed. 2. With the universe file open in Universe Designer, insert a new object. There are three ways you can insert an object: Click the Insert Object button from the Editing toolbar. Select Insert Object from the menu bar. Right-click the class and choose Object from the right-click menu. The Edit Properties dialog box for the object appears.
96
3. In the Name field, provide a meaningful object name. 4. In the Definition tab. Ensure that object names are always expressed in the end-user business vocabulary. This name may be different from the actual column names that the object is associated with in the database schema. 5. Type a SELECT statement in the Select box, or click the >> button to use the SQL editor. 6. Click the Properties tab and select object properties. 7. Click OK.
Automatically creating classes and objects from a table

You can also create classes and objects simply by dragging the entire table from the Structure pane into the Universe pane in Universe Designer. This is particularly useful if you are sure that you want all the columns in the table to correspond to objects in the universe.
Note: The class is automatically populated with a dimension object for every column in the table. It is not advisable to do this because you are creating a universe based on the database structure, not on the requirements of the users.
You can create an object automatically by selecting a column in a table in the Structure pane and dragging it to the Universe pane. An object is created under the nearest class to the point where you drop the column. The default name for the object is the column name. You should edit the new object properties to ensure that it is appropriately named, and is relevant to end-user needs. Whenever you create an object automatically, edit the properties of the object to: Change the name where appropriate. Enter a description. Change the object qualification from the default where necessary. Alter or remove the associated list of values settings where appropriate. Change other settings as required.
To automatically create an object from a column

1. Click a table column in the Structure pane. 2. Drag the column across to the Universe pane and drop the table at the desired position in the class hierarchy. The column must be dropped under an existing class. A new object appears in the hierarchy.
97
Defining a new object as a detail object

The Properties tab in the Edit Properties dialog box allows you to define the object qualification. An object can be qualified as a dimension, detail, or measure object. A detail object provides descriptive data about a dimension, and is always attached to a dimension. It maps to one or more columns or functions in the database that provide detailed information related to a dimension.
To define an object as a detail object

1. Double-click an object. The Edit Properties dialog box for the object appears. 2. Click the Properties tab. The Properties tab of the Edit Properties dialog box appears. 3. In the Qualification zone, select the Detail button. The Associated Dimension field appears in the Qualification zone.
4. Click the Associated Dimension field, and from the drop-down list of available dimension objects, select the one with which this detail object is to be associated. 5. Click OK to confirm the change.
98
Working with classes and subclasses

A subclass is a class within a class. You can use subclasses to help organize groups of objects that are related. A subclass can itself contain other subclasses or objects.
Note: It is recommended that you do not create too many levels of subclasses (more than three). Too many levels make it difficult for users to find the objects they need.
To create a subclass
1. Right-click the class in which you want to create a subclass. The drop-down menu appears. 2. Choose Subclass. The Edit Properties dialog box displays. 3. In the Class Name field enter the name of the subclass. 4. Click OK. The Universe pane should look similar to:
To delete a class or a subclass

1. There are two ways to delete a class, or subclass: Click the class, or subclass that requires deletion. Press the Delete key. Right-click the selected class, or subclass. Select the Clear option from the drop-down menu.
Editing the object properties

The following example shows the properties of the dimension object, called Client Name.
99
As the object is currently defined, there is no SELECT statement defined to reference the Client table. You need to edit the definition of the SELECT statement so the Client Name object returns the complete client name using the appropriate columns from the Client table.
Note: The example above shows a concatenation of two columns. Depending on the RDBMS used the syntax can vary. Consult the documentation provided by your database vendor to see what types of concatenation functions are supported.
100
To edit the object definition

1. Double-click the object that you want to edit. 2. In the Definition tab, type in the Name field if you want to edit the object name. 3. Click the Type arrow, and from the drop-down list, select the appropriate data type for the database column, or columns that the object references. 4. Click the Description text box and type help text for the end user. This text appears in Business Objects end-user querying tools when a user selects the object to build a query. The text describes the data returned when the user adds this object to a query. 5. Click the Select text box and enter the statement that will be inferred when a user builds a query using this object. This can be done in one of two ways: Type the SELECT syntax in the Select field to define the columns that will be referenced. Click the >> button to open the Edit Select Statement dialog box as displayed below. The Edit Select Statement dialog box appears.
It is normally best to use the latter method because it enables you to specify most of the SELECT syntax from pick lists in the lower half of the screen by double-clicking the item required. This minimizes typing and averts syntax errors due to typing mistakes. 6. Create the SELECT statement so the object references the appropriate table columns. Note: You can use the fields below the text box to select the columns, operators or functions you need to use to enter the required SQL syntax.
101
7. Click the Parse button to validate the statement syntax. 8. Click OK to close the Edit Select Statement dialog box. The Edit Select Statement dialog box closes and the Definition tab of the Edit Properties dialog box displays the SQL statement in the Select text box.
Edit Properties: Properties

The Properties tab in the Edit Properties dialog box allows users to: 1. Select one of the object types in the Qualification zone. Note: By default, the object type selected will be either a dimension or measure dependent on the data type chosen on the Definitions tab. Dimension=Character, Date or Number Measure=Selected by default when there is an aggregate function in the SELECT clause Note: The Detail qualification check box will be grayed out if no dimension objects exist to which to attach a detail object. 2. Select the appropriate options in the Associate a List of Values zone.
What is a list of values?

When you create an object, Universe Designer automatically associates a list of values (LOV) with the object. The LOV is not created until a user or the universe designer chooses to display a list of values for the object in the Query Panel. A SELECT Distinct query is then run against the column or columns inferred by the object. The returned data is stored in a file with an .lov extension in the universe subfolder created under the same folder that stores the universe file. The .lov file is then used as the source for values for the list. This allows the SELECT Distinct query to be run only once for an object.
When do you use a list of values?

A list of values should only be used with an object if it will provide something useful for the user. LOVs are very useful where there is a limited set of distinct values for the database columns underlying the object. Note: If the object is likely to refer to a large number of distinct rows in the database, it is advisable not to associate an LOV or change its configuration to avoid performance issues.
Setting LOV options

In the Associate a List of Values zone, the Display button allows you to view all the values in the database returned by this object. To restrict the object so that some of the values are not returned when an end user uses this object in a query, you can click the Edit button to create a filter (or condition) in the Query Panel that appears.
102
Edit Properties: Advanced

The Advanced tab allows you to set the security access level of the object and how it can be used in a query or in a report. You can select a security level which restricts use of the object to users with the appropriate security level.
In the Security Access Level zone you can assign the following security access levels: Public Controlled Restricted Confidential Private If you assign Public, then all users can see and use the object. If you assign Restricted, then only users with the user profile of Restricted or higher can see and use the object. In the Can be used in zone, select one of the following options to define how this object can be used in a query: The Result check box - use this object to return results in a query. The Condition check box - use this object to apply a condition or query filter in a query. The Sort check box - specify the object in the ORDER BY clause of a SELECT statement. Note: This option can increase the processing speed of a query. However, in certain edited LOV situations, it is not useful to sort at query level because block-level sorting overrides any row order of data that is stored in the microcube.
103
Edit Properties: Keys

The Keys tab allows you to define index awareness for an object. Index awareness is the ability to take advantage of the indexes on key columns in the database to speed data retrieval. The objects that you create in Universe Designer are based on database columns that are meaningful to an end user. For example, a Customer object retrieves the field that contains the customer name. In this situation, the customer table typically has a primary key that is not meaningful to the end user, but which is very important for database performance. When you set up index awareness in Universe Designer, you tell Universe Designer which database columns are primary and foreign keys. This can have a dramatic effect on query performance. In the example below, primary and foreign keys have been defined on the Client Country object. The complete WHERE clause for the primary key is:
COUNTRY.COUNTRY_ID = CLIENT.COUNTRY_ID
If you then use Country and the Client Name object in a query, the query will not need to reference the Country table in the database; the Country data will be taken from the Client table directly.
Edit Properties: Source Information

For universes generated from Data Integrator, technical descriptions and formulas used to calculate target tables from source tables are displayed in this tab.
104
You can specify the following types of information in the Source Information tab: Technical information: Technical descriptions that are available in universes generated from Data Integrator. Mapping information: The mapping applied within Data Integrator between the source tables and the target tables. The goal is not to provide the expression of the mapping, but to display it as a descriptive comment to inform the user of the source columns used in the object definition. Data Lineage information: List of source columns involved in a target column. This information facilitates the impact analysis through Data Integrator and Web Intelligence reports. It is possible to copy objects from one universe to another. This is useful if you want to create objects that are similar to those already existing in another universe. You can copy those objects or classes of objects and edit them as required. Note: When you copy an object from one universe into another, be sure to validate the object definition against the new universe structure and data source connection.
Copying and pasting objects

It is possible to copy objects from one universe to another. This is useful if you want to create objects that are similar to those already existing in another universe. You can copy those objects or classes of objects and edit them as required.
Note: When you copy an object from one universe into another, be sure to validate the object definition against the new universe structure and data source connection.
105
To copy and paste objects

1. Open the universe from where you want to copy objects. 2. Select the object(s) you want to copy. 3. Click copy from the standard toolbar. 4. Open the universe to which you want to copy the objects. 5. Click paste from the standard toolbar.
Find and replace

The find and replace functions can be very useful when editing. You can use the Find function to locate character strings in objects and their definitions. You can also use the Find function in conjunction with the Replace function to edit strings.
To find a string
1. Ensure the Universe pane of the Universe Designer window is active. Note: If the Structure pane of the universe is active, the Find function searches for table names containing the specified string.
2. Select the Universe pane, and click Find from the standard toolbar. The Find/Replace dialog box for finding class and objects components in the Universe pane opens.
106
3. Enter the character string for which to search. 4. Select the check box options as required. 5. Click Find Next. The appropriate object or part of the object definition will be displayed and the string will be highlighted. 6. To move to the next instance of the string, click Find Next or click the Find Next icon.
To replace as you find

1. Ensure the Universe pane of the Universe Designer window is active. Note: If the Structure pane of the universe is active, the Find/Replace function searches for table names containing the specified string.
2. Select the Universe pane, and click Find from the standard toolbar. The Find/Replace dialog box for finding class and objects components in the Universe pane opens. Select the Replace tab.
107
3. Enter the string to search for in the Find what field and the string with which it is to be substituted in the Replace field. 4. Select the check boxes as required. 5. Click Find Next. 6. Click Replace and then move to the next instance of the string by either clicking Find Next or the standard toolbar option.
Checking object integrity

Always check the integrity of your universe after defining classes and objects. Use the Check Integrity option to detect any errors in the SQL syntaxes used in the created objects.
Note: Ensure that the Check Cardinalities box is cleared. With a large database, this will save time running the integrity check.
To check object integrity

1. Click the Check Integrity button.
108
The Integrity Check dialog box displays.
2. Select the Parse Objects check box. 3. Click OK. 4. Universe Designer checks the universe and displays the Integrity Check Results dialog box. 5. Identify the reason for any reported errors and resolve them.
Viewing parent tables

You can view the table in the Structure pane that is used in an object definition from the Universe pane. This can be useful to quickly identify a table used by an object when object names do not easily indicate a specific table.
To view associated tables of an object

1. Right-click the object. 2. Select the View Associated Table option. The associated tables of the object will be highlighted in the Structure pane and the list mode display (if open).
To view associated objects

1. Right-click any table. 2. Select the View Associated Objects option. 3. The associated objects of the selected table will be highlighted in the Universe pane.
109
Testing objects
As you create objects in the universe, test them in Business Objects end-user querying tools by building and running queries. There are three things you need to test: Do the objects exist? If not, you may have forgotten to save and export your universe since the object you are testing was created. Does the SQL appear correct? Are the results of the query correct? Note: Remember that you must also test the joins already created in the structure.
Activity: Creating and testing classes and objects

Objective
Create and test classes and objects.
Instructions
In this workshop you will create classes, subclasses and dimension and detail objects in the Motors universe and then test the universes objects and joins. 1. Create the following class: Client 2. Create the following class and subclass: Car Sale Prices (subclass of Car) 3. Create a Client Name dimension object manually with the settings: Type = Character Description = Last name, First name SELECT =
CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME + ', ' + CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME
Associate an LOV 4. Create a Client ID detail object automatically with the settings: Type = Number Description = Unique Client ID Number SELECT =
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID
No Associated LOV 5. Check the integrity of the objects. 6. Create a Showroom class.
110
7. Create objects for each of the classes as identified in the tables below. Some of the properties for each object have been specified for you. However, you will have to determine the data type, qualification, and whether or not an LOV should be associated with each object.
111
Car class Object Name SELECT Statement MAKER.MAKER_NAME Maker Car Manufacturer Object Description
Category of Car
STYLE.STYLE_NAME
The style group into which a car fits (for example, coupe, 4x4)
Model
MODEL.MODEL_NAME +' ' + MODEL.MODEL_TRIM +' ' + MODEL.MODEL_ENGINE
Model name, trim, and engine size
Sale Prices class (a subclass of Car) Object Name SELECT Statement SALES_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE Object Description Description of price range banding Manufacturer recommended retail price
Price Range
Model Price
MODEL.MODEL_PRICE
Showroom class Object Name Showroom Town SELECT Statement SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_TOWN Object Description Town in which showroom exists Name of showroom Address of showroom
Showroom
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME
Showroom Address
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ADDRESS
Client class Object Name Country SELECT Statement COUNTRY.COUNTRY_NAME Object Description Country in which client resides Region of country in which client resides Area of Region in which
Region
REGION.REGION_NAME
Area
CLIENT.CLIENT_AREA
112
Object Name
SELECT Statement
Object Description client resides (for example, county or state)
Client Town
CLIENT.CLIENT_TOWN
Town or city in which client resides Address of client
Client Address
CLIENT.CLIENT_ADDRESS
Area Code
CLIENT.CLIENT_AREA_CODE
Postal or Zip Code
Phone Number
CLIENT.CLIENT_PHONE_NO
Phone number of client
Client ID
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID
Unique Client ID Number
8. Modify the properties of the following objects so that they are qualified as detail objects, and associated with the Client Name dimension object: Client Address Area Code Phone Number 9. Modify the properties of the Showroom Address object so that it is qualified as a detail object, and associated with the Showroom dimension object. 10.Create a class called Sales and two subclasses in the Sales class: Sales Details Sales Dates
Sales Details class (a subclass of Sales) Object Name Invoice ID Number SELECT Statement SALE.SALE_ID Object Description Unique Invoice ID Number
Sales Dates class (a subclass of Sales) Object Name Sale Date SELECT Statement SALE.SALE_DATE Object Description Date of sale
11.Drag the FINANCE_PERIOD table from the Structure pane and drop it in the Universe pane. Note: Delete the FP_Start and FP_End objects that are automatically created.
113
12.Edit the objects that have been created automatically in the new Finance class, according to the table below.
Financial Period class Object Name Financial Year SELECT Statement FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR Object Description For example, FY03-04
Financial Quarter
FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_QUARTER
For example, Q1 For example, Month 01
Financial Month
FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_MONTH
13.Make sure you have defined each object using the appropriate object type. The Universe pane in Universe Designer appears like this:
14.Save the universe. 15.Check the integrity of the objects, and make any alterations required.
114
Note: Test the validity of the joins also. 16.Test the universe by building queries in Web Intelligence Rich Client using the new objects. 17. Launch Web Intelligence Rich Client via Start Programs BusinessObjects XI 3.0 BusinessObjects Enterprise Web Intelligence Rich Client. 18.Log onto Web Intelligence Rich Client with the User name administrator. 19.Select the create a new document based on a data source icon. Select Browse for more data sources. 20.In the Data source selection menu select Universe, and click Next. 21.Select the Motors universe, and click OK. The Motors universe appears italicized. This indicates that this is a local copy of the universe rather than an exported version. 22.Build a new query using the objects you have created. Drag and drop the objects into the Result Objects pane. 23.Click Run Query to view the final results displayed in the report.
115
Quiz: Creating dimension objects

1. Which of the three types of objects contain aggregate functions that map to statistics in the database? 2. When you are testing objects, what are the three things for which you need to test? 3. If each object maps to a column or function in a target database, when used in a query, what kind of statement does the object infer?
116
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Define classes and objects Create classes and objects
117
118
Lesson 5
Creating Measure Objects

Lesson introduction
This lesson describes how to create measure objects and test that they produce the correct results when used in queries. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Define measure object concepts Create measure objects Create delegated measure objects
Creating Measure ObjectsLearners Guide
119
Defining measure object concepts

After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define measure objects Determine levels of aggregation
Measure objects concepts

A measure object returns numeric information. Measure objects are very flexible because they are semantically dynamic. This means that the values they return in a query will vary depending on the dimension and detail objects that are used with them. You can see from the illustration that two separate queries, using the same Sales Revenue measure object, but different dimension objects, results in the measure returning different values.
You create a measure object by using an aggregate function in the SELECT definition of the object. The five basic aggregate functions are: Sum Count Average Maximum Minimum A measure object returns numeric data from the database that aggregates up or down according to the dimension objects in the query. The most regularly used aggregates are listed above. However, there are others that can be used. The full set of aggregate functions is held in the Number Functions pick list of the Edit Select Statement dialog box.
How a measure object infers SQL

When a query uses a measure object with a dimension or detail object, the query definition automatically infers a GROUP BY clause in the SELECT statement.
120
Inference of the GROUP BY clause is dependent on the SQL rule: When the SELECT clause line contains an aggregate, everything outside of that aggregate in the clause must also appear in the GROUP BY clause. That is why dimension and detail objects must not contain aggregates. Any dimension or detail that is used in the same query as a measure object will always be included in an inferred GROUP BY clause. When a query includes only a measure object, the SQL inferred is the same as when the query uses a dimension object: The SELECT clause shows the object selected in the query with the syntax including the aggregate function. The FROM clause shows the tables involved in the measure object syntax. The WHERE clause identifies the joins among the tables involved. The query result shows one row of the total revenue value. In this example, the query includes only the Sales Revenue measure so the inference engine does not include a GROUP BY clause in the SQL statement.
When a query uses at least one dimension or detail object and a measure, the inference engine includes a GROUP BY clause with all the objects except the measure in the SQL Statement: The SELECT clause shows the object(s) and measure selected in the query with the syntax including the aggregate function. The GROUP BY clause includes all the objects except the aggregate. In this example, the query includes the Sales Revenue measure and the Country object so the inferred SQL statement includes a GROUP BY clause with the Country.
121
In this example, the query includes two dimensions (Country and Region) so the inference engine includes both dimensions in the GROUP BY clause. As a result, the values returned for the Sales Revenue measure object are aggregated to a lower level, the Region. This mechanism in the inference engine allows the measure objects to adapt dynamically to other, associated objects.
The query process

How do the Business Objects end-user querying tools process the measure object in a query, and how do the values get projected? There are two levels of aggregation in the query process: Aggregation at SELECT level Aggregation at projection level
122
Aggregation at SELECT level

Aggregation at SELECT level occurs first in the query process: The user creates a query. Web Intelligence Rich Client defines the SQL from the query and sends a SELECT statement to the target database. The data is returned to the microcube. The first level of aggregation now takes place in the microcube. The results are projected in the query. The microcube projects the aggregated data onto the report, the SQL statement is inferred against the database, and the results are returned to the microcube.
Aggregation at projection level

When you run a query, the result set of the SELECT statement is stored in the microcube. All data then held in the microcube is projected into a block (the table or chart in the report). Therefore, because data is projected from the lowest level held in the microcube, no projection aggregation takes place.
However, when you edit the table, for example, by removing a column, and therefore project only partial data from the microcube, aggregation is required to show measure values at a higher level. The data in the microcube remains unchanged.
123
For instance, if you do not project the region data into the block, the four rows related to USA need to be reduced to one to show the overall Sales Revenue for that country. In this instance, a sum aggregation is required.
When projecting all variables in the microcube, no aggregation takes place. When projecting only some variables from the microcube, aggregation occurs. Projection aggregation is separate from SELECT aggregation and depends on how you define the measure object properties when you create the measure object using Universe Designer.
Setting selection and projection aggregates

Statistically, only certain SELECT and projection aggregates are compatible.
SELECT Aggregate Recommended Projection Aggregate
Sum Count Average Maximum Minimum
Sum Sum None Maximum Minimum
For the reports to present statistically correct results for a measure object both at query and projection level, the SELECT and projection aggregates need to complement each other. However, as a universe designer, if you configure a measure differently, the Business Objects end-user querying tools will not stop you.
Note: With the exception of Average, the correct projected aggregate is selected by default. When you set the SELECT syntax to Average, for example Avg(SALES.SALES_TOTAL), the projection aggregation for this object would automatically be placed as a SUM. This would need to be changed manually to NONE.
The projection aggregation is set in the measure object properties:
124
Creating measure objects

After completing this unit, you will be able to: Create measure objects Test measure objects in Web Intelligence Rich Client
Measure objects
You create measure objects in the same way that you create a dimension or detail object. They can be created using the automatic or manual method. It is recommended that you group measure objects together in separate classes from dimension and detail objects, if they are generic. In other words, if they can be used in the same query as any dimension and detail object in the universe, then they are considered generic, and you must group them in separate classes. If they are only compatible with certain objects, however, then you may want to place them in the same class as those objects, to indicate this fact to the report designers. It is important to remember the following when you create measure objects:
In the Definition tab

The Type field must be set to Number. The Select field must include an aggregate function. Tip: It is best to use the Edit Select dialog box to insert the SELECT clause content of a measure as you can then use the Function and Columns pick lists. Note: When an aggregate function is used in the Edit Select dialog box, the qualification is automatically set to Measure type.
In the Properties tab

The qualification must be set as a Measure type. In the Function field, make sure the function you use is compatible with the aggregate used in the SELECT statement. A measure object should not have a list of values associated with it. Therefore, the Associate a List of Values check box should be unchecked.
125
Testing measure objects

When you test a measure, you must be far more rigorous in your checks than with a dimension or detail object. This is because you have to check that the values of the measure aggregate correctly both at SELECT and projection level. The three elements to testing a dimension or a detail object are: 1. Check that the objects exist. 2. Check the inferred SQL. 3. Check the query results. For measure objects, the additional elements are: Repeat with the other dimensions. Make a query with a minimum of two dimensions and a measure. To validate the accuracy of the measure aggregate, it is recommended that you test it with at least three separate queries.
Testing measures at SELECT level

To test the inferred SELECT statements for a measure object, you must make at least two separate queries using different dimension objects to produce different levels of aggregation. Three or more queries are preferable. In each instance, you must check the following: The inferred SQL of the query
126
In particular, you should check the GROUP BY clause has been inferred correctly. Note: If it has not been inferred at all, it is likely that you have set a calculation and not an aggregate in the Select field of the measure object properties. The results of the query Check that the query produces the correct results.
Testing measures at projection level

To test for projected aggregation, you need to build a query containing at least two dimension objects, as well as the measure object you are testing. This allows you to project from other than the lowest level of data held in the microcube and therefore test aggregation.
Activity: Creating and testing measure objects

Objective
Create and test measure objects.
Instructions
1. Create the following subclass in the Sales class: Sales Figures 2. Create a Sales Revenue measure object with the settings: Type = Number Description = Total Sale Invoice Revenue Select statement =
SUM(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * ((100 - SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT) / 100))
Function = SUM No associated LOV
127
3. Save and export the universe. This allows you to test the Sales Revenue object in Web Intelligence Rich Client. 4. Log onto Web Intelligence Rich Client. You will test the Sales Revenue object by running three queries. 5. Create a new query based on the universe you just exported, containing the Sales Revenue object. Note the value returned. 6. Test the Sales Revenue measure object by creating a second query, using the following steps: a. Edit the query created in the previous step, and click Add Query. b. Select the Motors.unv. c. Create a new query with Country and Sales Revenue. Check the SQL and note the GROUP BY clause. It should contain the SQL for the Country object. d. Click Run Queries. Note: You will be prompted to select a way to display the new query. You can leave the default option to add a new tab to the report or you can select the option to display the table in the current report. e. Apply a SUM calculation to the Sales Revenue column in the new projected block. Does the sum match the value shown in the first table? Note the value of the Sales Revenue in a row of the block (for example, USA). 7. Test the Sales Revenue measure object by creating a third query, using the following steps: a. Edit the second query and then click Add Query. b. Create a new query with Country, Region, and Sales Revenue. c. Check the SQL and note the GROUP BY clause. It should now contain the SQL for the Country and Region objects. Click Run Queries. d. Apply a break to the Country column and apply the sum calculation to the Sales Revenue column of the new projected block. Does the Country group sum match the value of the noted block row in the second table (for example, USA)? e. Edit the query. Change the projection to the block from the microcube by removing the Region column from the block. Does it aggregate to Country level correctly? f. Edit the query again. Change the projection to the block from the microcube by removing the Country column from the block. Does it aggregate to the total Sales Revenue level correctly? g. Edit the query again. Add the Showroom and Maker objects. h. Using drag and drop, insert two new tables, one to show Showroom and Sales Revenue, and the other to show Maker and Sales Revenue, and apply a sum to both tables. Note the total values remain the same. The final version of the report should look similar to this:
128
8. In Universe Designer, create the following measure objects in the Sales Figures subclass and test them. The SQL code for the SELECT properties of each object has been specified for you. However, you will have to determine the appropriate projection function aggregate.
Object Name Select Statement SUM(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_COST) Object Description Total Cost of Car Sales Total Number of Cars Sold
Cost of Car Sales
Number of Cars Sold
SUM(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY)
9. Create the measure objects listed below: In the Car class and Sale Prices subclass: Lowest Priced Value. The lowest priced value based on manufacturers recommended retail price. In the Car class and Sale Prices subclass : Highest Priced Value. The highest priced value based on manufacturers recommended retail price. In the Client class: Number of Clients. 10.Save the changes in the Motors universe, and test the new objects in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
129
Creating delegated measure objects

The XI 3.0 release of Universe Designer allows designers to create measures whose calculation is delegated to the database. These are called "delegated smart measures". After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define delegated measure and how they work Understand how you benefit from using delegated measures Know how to use delegated measures appropriately Apply best practices when using delegated measures
What is a delegated measure?

A delegated measure is a measure that delegates its aggregation calculation to the database. The universe designer defines a delegated measure in the universe to make it available to report users for ad hoc reporting or for viewing reports built on that universe. A universe designer can create a delegated measure when conventional Web Intelligence or Web Intelligence Rich Client aggregation does not provide an accurate result for the measure, such as for: Complex averages, such as Weighted averages (an average of a percentage). Ratios. Other measures that do not aggregate along all the dimensions in a report. OLAP sources where measure aggregations are already available in the OLAP cube. The delegated measure is then available to report designers in Web Intelligence and Web Intelligence Rich Client. Delegated measures are available for all relational and OLAP data sources.
The benefits of delegated measure

The delegated measure represents an extension of Web Intelligence and Web Intelligence Rich Client calculations by supporting aggregation within the database and makes non-additive measures available within the universe. You benefit from delegated measures because they: Increase Web Intelligence and Web Intelligence Rich Client querying efficiency. Make non-additive measures available within the universe. Use database-specific syntax to improve performance and provide optimization on the internal architecture of all vendors. Extend support of calculations beyond Web Intelligence and Web Intelligence Rich Client documents.
130
How does the delegated measure work?

By default, Web Intelligence and Web Intelligence Rich Client calculate measures based on the objects used within the query. The dimensions used in the query are called a grouping set. The delegated measure calculates the aggregation of the measure for any subset of dimensions required in the report. For example, a query that retrieves the dimensions Country, Region, Maker, Year, Number of Cars Sold and Average Sales Total would, by default, calculate the Number of Cars Sold and Average Sales Total for that grouping set. However, when you format your report, if you want to present the Number of Cars Sold and Average Sales Total for Region and Maker, Web Intelligence does not know how to calculate the correct Average Sales Total for these smaller entities. The delegated measure, on the other hand, calculates the measures for all subsets of the dimensions in the report. Thus, it would calculate Number of Cars Sold and Average Sales Total per: Country Country and Year Country, Region, and Year Country, Region, Maker, and Year
What happens when changes are made to the report?

When the report changes, the delegated measure updates the grouping set accordingly. When users add to the grouping set, the value #TOREFRESH appears to indicate that the value is missing and they need to refresh the report to see the measure. When users save their report, it removes unused grouping sets.
Using a delegated measure as a weighted average

A report designer wants to calculate the average sales total per region, and also for all regions. The universe designer has created a measure called Average Sales Total that calculates the average of the sales totals. When the user runs this in a Web Intelligence Rich Client query, together with Region, the average sales total per each region is calculated. The user then wants to calculate the average sales total level for all regions, and adds an average calculation on the Average Sales Total column.
131
A new row appears at the bottom of the table and this row displays the average sales total for all regions. This appears accurate, but it is not. Web Intelligence Rich Client is adding up the values shown in the Average Sales Total column and then dividing them up by six, since there are six regions available. The values in the Average Sales Total column are already calculated averages, so Web Intelligence is actually calculating the average of averages. What is required here is a weighted average, as some regions have more car sales revenue returns than others. The sales total value returned by those regions with more sales returns needs to count more heavily than those regions with fewer returns. When adding the Number of Cars sold figure to the query, you see here that the number of cars sold per region varies considerably. Sixty-eight cars were sold in the West Coast, while only thirteen in the East Coast.
When Web Intelligence Rich Client calculates the overall average sales total, it cannot take into account the fact that the West Coast should have more weight in the calculation of the average. Web Intelligence Rich Client does not have access to the detailed data, just to the regional average value, returned by the Average Sales Total measure.
132
To calculate a weighted average, you need to create a delegated measure in the universe, which will delegate this calculation to the database. To do this, you must modify the universe using BusinessObjects Universe Designer. In properties of the Average Sale Total measure, setting the function to Database delegated delegates this calculation to the database and effectively calculates a weighted average.
Running the same query using the Average Sales Total measure with the function set to Database delegated, results in the correct average total:
Best practices for using delegated measures

Keep in mind the following best practices for effective use of delegated measures:
133
Use a delegated measure when report users manipulate the measures in reports. When they only need to refresh, view and print their reports, the calculation may be simpler to perform in the report. Use a delegated measure to replace multiple query aggregates. Use a delegated measure on calculations that could give inaccurate results when calculated in the report (such as a complex average). Use a delegated measure for measures requiring division. When you create the delegated measure in the universe make sure that in the Edit Properties dialog box for the measure, on the Definition tab, you enter identifying text in the Description field. This ensures report designers can quickly recognize a delegated measure when they glide their mouse over it in a query
When are delegated measures inappropriate?

Do not use delegated measures when you apply a filter to an aggregated value from your query and further aggregate it within the report. Web Intelligence cannot determine how the filter affects the calculation of the delegated measure and, instead, returns the cell error code #UNAVAILABLE. For example, do not use delegated measures when there is a: Report filter on a dimension that is not in the dimensional context. Report filter on the formula. Formula in the dimensional context of the measure. However, for drill filters and for simple filters combined with AND at the first level of drilling, the context takes the related dimension into account. Also, do not use a delegated measure when a standard measure works.
Activity: Creating and using a delegated measure

Objectives
Create a delegated measure in Universe Designer. Use a delegated measure in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
Instructions
1. In Universe Designer, open the Motors universe. 2. In the Sales Figures class, create a new measure called Average Sales Total: SELECT syntax:
avg(SALE.SALES_TOTAL)
In the Properties tab, set the aggregation function to None. 3. Save the universe and log onto Web Intelligence Rich Client.
134
4. Create a new query using the Region and the Average Sales Total objects. Click Run Query. 5. Select the Average Sales Total column and select the average function from the toolbar. Activate the sum drop-down list, and select average. Is the result correct? 6. Edit the query and add Number of Cars Sold. Evaluate the average value that is shown at the bottom of the Average Sales Total column. Does this reflect the correct average per Region? 7. Return to Universe Designer and copy the Average Sales Total object and paste it in the same class. Name the copied object Delegated Sales Total Average. Ensure the Associate a List of Values option for the Delegated Sales Total Average measure is cleared. 8. In the Properties tab, set the aggregation function to Database delegated. Save the universe. 9. Return to Web Intelligence Rich Client. 10.Add Region, the Average Sales Total, and the Delegated Sales Total Average objects to the Query Panel. Click Run Query. 11.Add an average to the Average Sales Total column, as done in step 4. 12.Drag the Delegated Sales Total measure object from the Data tab and position it in the cell at the bottom of the Delegated Sales Total column. Drop the Delegated Sales Total measure object in the cell at the bottom of this column.
Note that the cell now displays a text string: #TOREFRESH. This indicates that the average will not be calculated by Web Intelligence Rich Client, but it must be calculated by the database. You need to refresh the document to retrieve the calculated results from the database. 13.Click Refresh Data.
135
You see here that the average calculated by the database does not return the same value as the value calculated by Web Intelligence Rich Client. Because the database has access to the detailed data concerning all satisfaction levels in these regions, the result is based on a weighted average. The database is able to take into account the difference in numbers of customers per region.
136
Quiz: Creating measure objects

1. Measure objects are very flexible because they are semantically dynamic. What does this mean? 2. Measure objects are created in the same way as a dimension or detail object. However, the object properties differ in two ways. What are they?
137
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Explain measure object concepts Create measure objects Create delegated measure objects
138
Lesson 6
Resolving Loops in a Universe

Lesson introduction
This lesson describes loops, a particular type of join issue that can arise as you create joins between tables in your schema. It explains how you can detect and resolve loops to ensure that the join paths taken by queries run on the universe return correct results. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand loops Resolve loops using aliases Resolve loops using contexts
Resolving Loops in a UniverseLearners Guide
139
Understanding loops
A loop is a join path issue that arises from the way that tables are related in a relational database. Loops can produce instances where a query returns too few rows of data. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand the causes of loops Detect loops in a universe structure
Problems caused by loops

Suppose users of the Motors universe want to produce reports showing the revenue generated by car sales to clients, including both the location of the showroom where the cars are sold and the address (including country) of the clients. The designer adds the tables needed to provide this information and creates the joins as shown in the previous example. The designer has also created objects for the Showroom Country, Client Country, and Sales Revenue. If the loop was allowed to remain and a query was run using the Showroom Country, Client Country and Sales Revenue objects, the report results would be incorrect. The report would suggest that only clients from the US bought cars in the US showrooms, and only clients from the UK bought cars in the UK showrooms. However, the report would not show any clients from any other countries. When you know that there are clients from other countries, this result indicates that there is a problem with the report.
Loops in a universe schema and not in the database

In a database, multiple paths between tables can be valid and implemented to meet specific user requirements. When each path is included individually in a query, it returns a distinct set of results. However, a schema that you design in Universe Designer often needs to allow queries that include more than one path, which a relational database may not be designed to handle. As a result, the information returned can be incorrect. The rows that are returned are an intersection of the results for the path, so fewer rows are returned than expected. It is often difficult to determine the problem when you examine the results.
140
Recognizing loops
A loop exists when the joins between tables form a closed path. For example, in the table layout above, the designer has added joins between the tables Showroom and Country to create two linked sets of information. One set links the car sale details, the client, the clients region and the clients country of residence. The other set links the car sale details, the showroom, and the country where the showroom is located. Together, these joins form a loop.
What is the loop doing?

The joins in the Structure pane are used to create the WHERE clause in the inferred SQL of a query. Joins restrict the data that is returned by the query. In a loop, the joins will apply more restrictions than the designer intended, and the data returned will be incorrect. This is an example of a WHERE clause created by a loop:
WHERE {COUNTRY.COUNTRY_ID=SHOWROOM.COUNTRY_ID} AND {COUNTRY.COUNTRY_ID=REGION.COUNTRY_ID } AND {REGION.REGION_ID=CLIENT.REGION_ID } AND {CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID } AND {SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID=SALE.SHOWROOM_ID } AND {SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID } AND {SALE.SALE_TYPE= 'S' }
Notice that the two joins at the top of the SQL statement are both applying a restriction to the Country table, which is serving two purposes:
141
It is being used as the Lookup for the Showroom Country It is also the Lookup for the Client Country This creates a restriction so that data is returned only when the Showroom Country is the same as the Client Country. Consequently, the report shows only the revenue generated by US clients in the US showrooms and by UK clients in the UK showrooms. In summary, while the above loop infers legitimate SQL, the results will not include all intended values. Therefore, a query on a universe involving such a loop will return misleading data. To avoid this, the loop must be resolved.
Resolving loops
Loops are an inherent problem when writing SQL statements. There are various techniques within SQL that you can apply to resolve loops.
How Universe Designer deals with loops

There are automatic methods built into Universe Designer that can be used to identify and resolve almost all loop problems. The two main methods of resolving loops are: Aliases Contexts Loops can be resolved by creating aliases and contexts manually. However, depending on the complexity of a universe, this can be a cumbersome task. There is functionality built into Universe Designer that allows for automatic detection and resolution of loops. This functionality can only be reliable if cardinality has been defined correctly for each join in the universe. Furthermore, due to performance implications, it is recommended that all cardinality be set manually at the time each join is created.
142
Resolving loops using aliases

One way to solve a loop in the universe structure is to create an alias table. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe aliases Resolve loops using aliases Resolve self-referencing join loops using aliases
About aliases
An alias breaks a loop by using the same table twice in the same query for a different purpose. The alias is identical to the base table but with a different name. The data in the alias is exactly the same as the original table, but the different name tricks SQL into using the same database table for two different purposes. The Country table has already been identified as a shared lookup table because it is serving two purposes in the query you are trying to run (providing data for the Client Country and also for the Showroom Country). In the example above, you can see the Country table joined to the Region table for the Client side of the query. The Country table also is the Showroom table for the Showroom side of the query.
Note: Another way of spotting the problem table in a loop is that it will have only the one end of the one-to-many joins going into it. Check the other tables in the loop. If you find no others with only one-end joins, the loop can be resolved using an alias, assuming there are no other tables joined to country.
To resolve the loop, you need to use the same table (the Country table) twice in the same query when it is being used for different purposes. However, you cannot do this in SQL unless you create an Alias table. You can resolve the loop satisfactorily by creating only one alias table in the example we have been using. The Region join uses the original Country table, while the Showroom join uses the alias table. However, you could create a separate alias table for each join in the original table. In the past, this was necessary for some relational databases. Today, it is not necessary. However, some universe designers prefer to alias both tables.
Detecting loops and inserting aliases

The Universe Designer module has automatic tools that detect loops and create aliases for you. You can use the Detect Loops or Detect Aliases toolbar icons, to automatically detect and indicate the tables causing loops in the active universe. Detect Aliases proposes candidate tables that you can edit, and insert in the schema. Note: Before using Detect Aliases, verify that all the tables in schema are linked by joins, and that all cardinalities are set.
143
To detect loops using the automatic detection tool

1. Click the Detect Loop button. The system highlights the loop in the Structure pane, and displays the Loop Detection dialog box.
2. The Loop 1/1 indicates how many loops have been detected. If there are others, you can use the forward and back arrow buttons to check each loop. The message beneath the buttons indicates (in this case) that the loop can be resolved with an alias. 3. Click Insert Alias in the Loop Detection dialog box. Universe Designer automatically creates an alias for the required table. You may need to move the new alias table so that you can see the Structure pane. Note: The original table name will show up in brackets in the alias table header. 4. Close the Loop Detection dialog box. The Structure pane will look similar to this:
144
In the example diagram, the Country_Showroom alias table has been created in the Structure pane, the join between this alias table and the Showroom table has been made automatically, and the loop has been broken.
Note: When the problem table has two purposes, Universe Designer might nominate either of the two as the candidate for the alias table.
To insert an alias automatically

Universe Designer has an automatic tool that detects the tables that could be aliased to resolve loops. 1. Click the Detect Aliases button. The system displays an Alias Detection message similar to the following:
If you have not yet set cardinalities, this message reminds you that you must do so first. If cardinalities have already been set, the reason for the message may be a self-restricting join within the universe structure. Cardinality is not relevant for these types of joins and so designers tend not to set cardinality for them. However, to avoid the message, you could make self-restricting joins one-to-one. 2. Click OK. The Candidate Alias dialog box displays. 3. Select a table name and click Rename. The Rename Table dialog box displays. 4. Enter the new name for the alias and click OK. The Rename Table dialog box closes and the new alias name is shown in the right panel. 5. To create the alias table, click Create. Universe Designer displays a confirmation request. 6. Click OK to create the alias table. Note: If there are several candidates for aliases, you can then repeat the process for the next table. When there is only one candidate, the Candidate Alias dialog box closes. Tip: Be careful not to delete the original table. Once you have created one or more alias tables, its a good idea to click beside the original table in the Structure pane and type Aliased table Do not remove, for example, to remind you not to delete it.
145
To insert an alias manually

Instead of using the Loop Detection or Alias Detection tools, you can create the alias manually. 1. Select the table for which you want an alias by clicking the table header. 2. Insert an alias using one of the following methods: Click the Insert Alias button. Right-click the table and select Alias from the right-click menu. 3. Enter the new name for the alias table and click OK. This creates an alias table for the selected table. Note: The original table name appears in brackets in the alias table header. 4. Remove the appropriate join from the original table. 5. Reset the join to the alias table. 6. Set the cardinality for the join. The Structure pane should now look the same as when using the first method, the Loop Detection tool. 7. If there are several candidates for aliases, you can then repeat the process for the next table. When there is only one candidate, the Candidate Alias dialog box closes. Tip: Be careful not to delete the original table. Once you have created one or more alias tables, its a good idea to click beside the original table in the Structure pane and type Aliased table Do not remove, for example, to remind you not to delete it.
Redefining objects
When you create an alias table, check that any existing objects that are defined from the original table still refer to the right table. They may need to be defined from the alias table to infer the correct SQL and get the correct result.
Finding objects defined from a table

In a simple universe, it is not difficult to find the objects that have been defined from a table. There is a utility in Universe Designer that allows you to easily determine all existing objects that point to a single table in the structure of the universe. Universe Designer provides an option to assist in finding the relevant objects. 1. Right-click the header of the original table in the Structure pane. 2. Choose View associated objects from the right-click menu. This highlights all the objects that were defined from the original table in the Universe pane. Redefine the highlighted objects to make sure they point to the correct table. 3. Double-click the affected object to open the Object Properties dialog box.
146
4. Redefine the SELECT statement to use the alias table instead of the original table. 5. Click OK and then save the universe.
Listing and renaming aliases

You can list aliases and rename them. To invoke the aliases list: 1. Select the List of Aliases option from the Tools drop-down list. The List of Aliases panel appears.
To rename an alias from the List of Aliases panel

To rename aliases from the list of aliases: 1. Click the alias you want to rename. 2. Edit the alias name in the New Name field and click OK. Note: The alias name changes in the universe structure as well as any object referencing the alias and context lists.
Choosing which alias method to use

Method Advantages Disadvantages
Detect loops
can view loops before applying them
may show other loops to be resolved by contexts
Detect aliases
finds all candidate aliases exclusively
no visual check prior to acceptance
Insert alias
choose table to alias, minimizing object redefinition
must understand how to identify the need for candidate analysis
Whichever method you choose, you must always redefine objects that now use the alias table.
Resolving self-referencing join loops using aliases

A join does not always have to involve two different tables. You can join a table to itself, creating a self-referencing join. A self-referencing join is a join from one column of a table to another
147
column of the same table. Joining a table to itself can be useful when you want to compare values in a column to other values in the same column. A classic example of when such a join is required is in a situation whereby you want to report on the hierarchical structure of an organization via a Personnel database. In such a situation, it is most probable that all employee records are held in a single table, irrespective of status. Hence, a self-referencing join is required to report on the hierarchical relationship between those employees. For example, in the Motors database there is an employees table that contains columns as shown below:
Each employee is uniquely identified by the Emp_Id field, and each employee has a manager, who is identified by the Emp_Mgr_Id field. However, the managers are themselves employees, and the table therefore contains a hierarchical structure. If you want to add a join to link each employee with their respective manager, the obvious way is to link the Emp_Mgr_Id field to the Emp_Id field, as in this example:
The code used to identify the manager (Emp_Mgr_Id ) is itself an employee code. You can therefore use it to look up the Emp_Id codes in the Employee table and identify the managers name. This is effectively a loop, as the path forms a closed circuit. However, you cannot resolve it by using the usual method of detecting the cardinalities and then detecting aliases. This is because the cardinality detection tool cannot work on a self-referencing join. Moreover, a structure expressed this way will not infer the correct SQL.
148
To resolve a self-referencing join with an alias

1. Right-click the table header and choose Alias from the right-click menu. 2. Enter an appropriate alias table name. 3. Click OK. 4. Draw the join between the original table and its alias. 5. Double-click the join. The Edit Join dialog box opens. 6. Set the cardinality for the join. 7. When the self-referencing join has been resolved, you can create separate objects for both tables.
Activity: Using aliases to resolve loops

Objectives
Resolve loops by creating alias tables Test your results in Web Intelligence Rich Client
Instructions
In this activity you will add new tables, insert new joins, and set cardinality, that will create loops in the Motors universe. You will then resolve the loops and test them. 1. Insert the following join and set its cardinality. COUNTRY.COUNTRY_ID=SHOWROOM.COUNTRY_ID 2. Use the Detect Loop toolbar button to test for loops in your universe. To solve the loops that you have detected by creating alias tables, press the Insert Aliases button in the Loop Detection dialog box, or use the Insert Alias toolbar button and create two alias tables called: COUNTRY_SHOWROOM COUNTRY_REGION 3. Disconnect the original COUNTRY table from the other tables and use the alias tables to redefine the joins as follows: COUNTRY_SHOWROOM.COUNTRY_ID=SHOWROOM.COUNTRY_ID COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID=REGION.COUNTRY_ID 4. Create a Country object in the Showroom class with the settings: Name = Showroom Country Type = Character Description = Country in which showroom exists
149
SELECT =
COUNTRY_SHOWROOM.COUNTRY_NAME
Associate an LOV 5. Edit the Country object in the Client class as follows: Name = Client Country SELECT =
COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME
6. Check integrity by selecting the Check Integrity button in the toolbar. The check integrity tool finds divergences because the COUNTRY table is now isolated. Ignore this message and dont delete the original table. 7. Save the universe. 8. Test your changes in Web Intelligence Rich Client by building a query containing Showroom Country, Client Country, and Sales Revenue objects. 9. Edit the query and remove the Client Country, and Sales Revenue objects. Run the query with just the Showroom Country object. 10.In Universe Designer, create an additional alias of the COUNTRY table, called COUNTRY_MAKER. 11.Insert the following join: COUNTRY_MAKER.COUNTRY_ID=MAKER.COUNTRY_ID Make sure that the join cardinality is set to one-to-many (1-N). 12.Create a Maker Country object in the Car class. 13.Test your changes in Web Intelligence Rich Client by building a query containing Maker Country, Maker, and Model objects. 14.In Universe Designer, open the Staff universe. You want to report on managers and their staff. 15.Add the EMPLOYEE table to the structure and create a self-referencing join, joining the EMP_ID and EMP_MGR_ID columns. 16.Create a class called Employees. 17.Create a Staff dimension object based on the EMPLOYEE table. Concatenate the employee's last name and first name. 18.Test the object by displaying the List of Values in the Properties tab. Is this returning the correct results? Tip: To get the query to infer the correct SQL, you need to resolve the self-referencing join in the universe structure. 19.Create an alias table of the EMPLOYEE table and rename it MANAGERS. Join the tables as shown below:
150
20.Create a Managers dimension object based on the MANAGERS alias table. Concatenate the manager's last name and first name columns. 21.Check the integrity of the Staff universe with all except the cardinality options checked. Resolve any relevant divergence. Tip: You should not find any divergences. 22.Save the Staff universe, and test the results in Web Intelligence Rich Client. Make sure that the Manager object returns only managers. Also check that all employees are returned, even if they do not have a manager.
151
Resolving loops using contexts

Another way to solve a loop in the universe structure is to create contexts. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe contexts Resolve loops using contexts
About contexts
A context resolves a loop by defining a set of joins that define one specific path through tables in a loop. It ensures that joins are not included from different paths within the same SQL query. You often use contexts in schema that contain multiple fact tables that share lookup tables. An example of this situation is the Sale table in the Motors universe. The Sale table contains rows of data for cars both sold and rented. The Sale_Type column is used as a flag to indicate the type of transaction (S = car sale, R = car rental). Without the self restricting join, the result set of the query would produce rows where the Sale_Type column is equal to either S or R. Previously, you defined this self-restricting join to S, so that any object based on the table or joins passing through that table would produce query results covering only car sales. In order to retrieve data concerning rental sales as well, you create an alias of the Sale table called Rental, set the self-restricting join to R and create an alias table of the Sale_Model table called Rental_Model. Creating the aliases tables, however, will create a loop because the query will not know which table to go through to get to the Model table, Sale or the alias Rental. You can solve this type of loop by creating two contexts which will define the correct route through the universe structure. These routes link tables together in the structure.
What is a context?
A context is a list of joins that define a path for a query. The tables involved in the joins are included in the context. Any objects derived from tables included in a context are compatible with each other. When a query is made with objects related to separate contexts, more than one SELECT statement is inferred and run. The results of the queries are then merged in the microcube. This avoids incorrect results that might arise due to a loop or other situation with alternative routes. Alternative routes can exist without a loop in the universe structure.
Detecting and creating contexts

A separate context is identified for each table with only the many end of joins attached. The joins in a context are identified by working back from the table with only the many end of joins attached - many-to-one, many-to-one.
152
Identifying the joins that make up a context

Universe Designer detects contexts by identifying tables that have only the many ends of joins attached. It does this progressively throughout the structure. No joins flowing back from one-to-many are included. To help to see the flow of contexts within a structure, you can arrange the tables so that all the joins flow as many-to-one from left to right across the structure. Included in the context are all the tables that can be reached by following the flow from many-to-one (N -1). Tables that can only be reached by flowing back from one-to-many (1-N) are not included in the context. Note: The diagram shows a portion of the tables in the Motors universe. If contexts are an important part of your universe structure, it can be very helpful to arrange your tables in this way, so that you can easily see the individual contexts.
When it is not appropriate to resolve a loop by using an alias to break the loop, the loop must be left in place. However, this results in an error message when running an end-user query. This is because there are two alternate routes around the structure. Contexts are used to specify those alternate routes and ensure that a single inferred SELECT statement only includes reference to columns from tables in one of those routes. In the Sales and Rental example, you can follow two different paths from the Client table to the Model table: By way of Rental and Rental_Model:
153
By way of Sale and Sale_Model:
Each context represents what may be inferred in a single SELECT statement. Any query that infers some SQL code exclusive to one context and some exclusive to the other will infer two separate SELECT statements.
154
This loop can be resolved by two candidate contexts:

Rental_Model Context COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID=REGION.COUNTRY_ID Sale_Model Context COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID=REGION.COUNTRY_ID
REGION.REGION_ID=CLIENT.REGION_ID
REGION.REGION_ID=CLIENT.REGION_ID
CLIENT.CLIENT.ID=RENTAL.CLIENT_ID
CLIENT.CLIENT.ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID
RENTAL.SALE_ID=RENTAL_MODEL.SALE_ID
SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID
RENTAL_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID
SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID
MODEL.MODEL_DAYRENT between RENTAL_PRICE_RANGE.RENT_RANGE_MIN and RENTAL_PRICE_RANGE.RENT_RANGE_MAX
MODEL.MODEL_PRICE between SALES_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MIN and SALES_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MAX
MODEL.STYLE_ID=STYLE.STYLE_ID
MODEL.STYLE_ID=STYLE.STYLE_ID
MODEL.MAKER_ID=MAKER.MAKER_ID
MODEL.MAKER_ID=MAKER.MAKER_ID
MAKER.COUNTRY_ID=COUNTRY_MAKER.COUNTRY_ID
MAKER.COUNTRY_ID=COUNTRY_MAKER.COUNTRY_ID
Note: The name of the context is normally defined by the table with only the many (N) end of joins attached to it. You then create different sets of objects from the tables in the different contexts. As a result, users can run either Sales queries or Rentals queries, dependent on the objects they select. Note: Every join (except shortcut joins) must exist in at least one context.
Detecting and creating contexts

The table below shows the toolbar buttons you can use to detect and create contexts. Detect loops Loop detection tool suggests candidates for both aliases and contexts.
Detect contexts
Detect Contexts detects and proposes a list of contexts to create.
155
Insert contexts Insert Contexts inserts a context manually.
To detect contexts using the Loop Detection tool

1. Click the Loop Detection button in the Editing toolbar. The system displays the Loop Detection dialog box.
The first loop is highlighted in the Structure pane, and the message tells you that this loop is not covered by any context. If other loops exist, click the forward arrow button to cycle through the loops. Each loop is highlighted in turn, and a method of resolution is recommended. 2. Click the Candidate Context button to see what the tool suggests. The Candidate Contexts dialog box displays.
3. Highlight the candidate context you want to add and click the Add button. The context moves across to the Accepted Contexts field. You can click the Rename button to give each context a more meaningful name.
156
Note: You may choose to leave the original context name in brackets. This can be useful in order to remind you that you have changed the joins in the context, while still allowing you to view the original definition. 4. Repeat the process until you have accepted all the candidate contexts. Note: Each candidate context is highlighted in the structure as you highlight it in the Candidate Contexts field. This enables you to check the context before accepting it. The Candidate Contexts dialog box closes, and the List Mode window opens in the upper part of the Structure pane. 5. Click OK. 6. Close the Loop Detection dialog box. The List Mode window shows the created contexts.
The Joins pane indicates the joins that are involved in the currently highlighted context. The Structure pane highlights the tables that are involved. 7. When you have created the contexts you require to resolve the loops, save the universe.
To detect contexts using the detect contexts tool

1. Select Tools Automated Detection Detect Contexts , or click the Detect Contexts button. The system may display this message:
You may have just set the cardinalities, but you can still get this message because of self-restricting joins. The system does not set cardinality on these, and therefore displays this message. Click OK to continue because you have set the cardinality for all of the joins. 2. Click OK. The system displays the Candidate Contexts dialog box.
157
3. Highlight the candidate context you want to add and click the Add button. You move contexts across to the Accepted Contexts field. Rename them, if required, in the same way as when using the Loop Detection tool. 4. Repeat the process until you have accepted all the candidate contexts. 5. Click OK and save the universe.
To insert contexts manually

1. Click the Insert Contexts button. The New Context dialog box appears. 2. Define a name to identify the context in the Context Name field. 3. Select the joins that define the path for the context by clicking the individual joins in the Current context join list. To remove a join from the selected list, click it again to remove the highlight. Note: From the List Mode window, you can open the Edit Context dialog box to add joins by double-clicking the context in the Contexts pane. 4. When you have made a selection of joins, click the Check button to have Universe Designer check whether there are any loops in the joins you have selected. 5. In the Description field, enter the text that displays in the user module Help field. 6. Click OK to create the context and close the dialog box.
Creating objects for each context

When all the contexts are in place, you can create objects. Some objects refer to tables that are included in only one of the contexts. In this example, such objects include Sales Revenue or Rental Revenue. Other objects refer to tables which appear in both contexts. In this example, such objects include Client Name.
Editing a context
Sometimes, a user creates a query using objects that reference tables from opposite ends of two contexts, for example, a query using Client Name and Model. The Client and Model tables are on opposite sides of the Rental and Sales contexts. As a result, there are two potential routes for the inference engine to use in the SELECT statement so, when the end users run the query, they receive a prompt message to choose one of those contexts. As the term context is not meaningful to end users, you need to ensure that the context names and the Help descriptions clearly indicate how the choice of context influences the results.
158
To edit the name and help description

1. Open the List Mode window by clicking the View List Mode button on the standard toolbar. 2. In the Contexts pane, double-click the context you want to edit. The Edit Context dialog box displays. 3. Scroll down the list of highlighted joins to verify that all required joins are included. You can add additional joins, or remove unnecessary joins. 4. The Context Name shows the name you accepted (or altered) when you created the context. The Join List shows all the joins that are included in the context path. The highlighted joins are included. Modify the context name if required. 5. Click the Description field and enter a suitable explanation of the contexts purpose. 6. Click OK to close the Edit Context dialog box. 7. Click the View List Mode button to close the List Mode window. 8. Save the universe. The description that you entered appears in the Context Selection Help dialog box in Business Objects end-user querying tools, and the process of selecting a context is made easier for end users.
Testing contexts
Any end-user query that generates a SELECT statement which spans across the loop will fail without contexts in place. If contexts are in place, the end-user query tool generates the SELECT statement(s) in one of three ways. To test contexts, make at least three queries, one to test each form of SQL generation when applying contexts. The three query types are: Inferred query Incompatible objects query Ambiguous query
Inferred query
A query is run without prompting an end user to choose a context. The query contains enough information for the correct context to be inferred. For example, a user runs a query using the Showroom, Model and Sales Revenue objects. When these queries are run, the data is returned without prompting the user to select a context. The Sales Revenue object is a sum on the Sale_Model table, which is part of the Sales context. The query infers that the Sales context is the one to use for the query.
Incompatible objects query

Objects that reference tables with joins belonging to two different contexts are included in a single query. The tool creates one SELECT statement for each context, executes the queries, and then unites the results together so that the report data can be presented in a single table.
159
For example, if you run a query containing the Showroom, Model objects with both Sales Revenue and Rental Revenue objects, no single context contains all the joins necessary to include the Showroom, Sale, Sale_Model, Rental, and Rental_Model tables to which the three objects refer. It therefore generates two SELECT statements in the query and merges the results in a single microcube report. Note: For an incompatible objects query to work, you need two contexts.
Ambiguous query
An end user is prompted to choose between one query path or another. This occurs when a query includes objects that, when used together, do not give enough information to determine one context or the other. When a query is ambiguous, the user is prompted by a dialog box in the Query Panel to select the appropriate context. When the user selects a context, the corresponding tables and joins are inserted into the SQL query. For example, if you run a query containing only the Showroom and Model objects, more than one context contains all the joins necessary to include the Showroom and Model tables to which the two objects refer. The user is prompted to identify which context to use by displaying the Context Selection dialog box. When the user selects one of the contexts and clicks OK, a SELECT statement is inferred using the join path for the context chosen. Note: For a user to select more than one context when running an ambiguous query, the Allow selection of multiple contexts option in the SQL tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box in the Universe Designer module must be selected.
160
Updating contexts
Contexts are not updated automatically when the universe structure is changed. If you add or remove any tables or joins to the structure, you will have to update all the contexts. If you have made only a simple change to the structure, you can update the joins that are included in each context manually using the Edit Context dialog box. However, if you have made significant changes to the universe structure, it can be safer to remove the current contexts and recreate them.
Recommended sequence
It is always best to create all your alias tables first, and then create your contexts, because of the requirement to update contexts. Otherwise, your alias tables will not be included in your previously created contexts. For loop resolution, therefore, the sequence is as follows: 1. Set cardinality on all joins. 2. Use Detect Aliases to detect all the loops that can be resolved with alias tables. 3. Insert all the required alias tables and their associated joins. Remember to set cardinality on any new joins. 4. Use Detect Contexts to detect all the contexts that can be used to resolve the remaining loops that could not be resolved with an alias. 5. Accept the candidate contexts, or create your own contexts manually. The need to follow this sequence highlights the main drawback of using the Loop Detection tool. If you detect all loops, and then follow the Loop Detection dialog box suggestions for resolving them in the order that they are presented, you will not necessarily resolve all the alias table loops first, followed by all the context loops. It is therefore better to use the alias detection tool first, and then the context detection tool. Remember also that you will have to redefine any objects that are based on tables for which you have created aliases. The overall sequence in universe design is as follows: 1. Add tables to the universe. 2. Insert joins. 3. Detect and resolve loops. 4. Create all the classes and objects. Note: If you want to test your loop resolution in a query, you may need to create some basic objects to allow you to run some simple queries. If you do this, always bear in mind the need to redefine them when you have finished resolving loops.
161
Loops and shortcut joins

In some instances, a loop can be broken up by altering a join from a standard join to a shortcut join. A shortcut join is a join that links two tables together but bypasses intervening tables that exist in the universe. Shortcut joins can change the results of existing queries and therefore should be used sparingly. Shortcut joins should only be used when designing universes where it is possible in certain circumstances to make the inferred SQL more efficient. For example, the Staff universe currently allows for reporting on managers and their subordinates.
The end users require absence reporting, and the Absence table is added to the structure:
When a query is run using Manager name, and Total Absence days, the SQL suggests that the report produces the total days absence for all employees by manager.
SELECT DISTINCT MANAGER.EMP_LASTNAME+', '+MANAGER.EMP_FIRSTNAME, sum((datediff(dd, ABSENCE.ABS_START, ABSENCE.ABS_END) + 1)) FROM
162
EMPLOYEE MANAGER RIGHT OUTER JOIN EMPLOYEE ON (EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID=MANAGER.EMP_ID) GROUP BY MANAGER.EMP_LASTNAME+', '+MANAGER.EMP_FIRSTNAME
Adding a shortcut join to the schema alters the results.
SELECT DISTINCT MANAGER.EMP_LASTNAME+', '+MANAGER.EMP_FIRSTNAME, sum((datediff(dd, ABSENCE.ABS_START, ABSENCE.ABS_END) + 1)) FROM ABSENCE INNER JOIN EMPLOYEE MANAGER ON (ABSENCE.EMP_ID=MANAGER.EMP_ID) GROUP BY MANAGER.EMP_LASTNAME+', '+MANAGER.EMP_FIRSTNAME
The shortcut join is taking precedence and the result of the query has changed. It now suggests the absence for each manager.
Shortcut joins and loop detection

Shortcut joins are not automatically detected for contexts. If you want to include them in a context you have to manually edit the context. However, this is not always desirable. Ideally, shortcut joins should bypass contexts when specific queries do not require one or more contexts to return the results, and therefore should be left as standalone or isolated joins. The efficiency gains of a shortcut join are based on the fact that it spans across contexts. In the Motors universe, a shortcut join appears to be the ideal way of joining Showroom to Maker in order to produce a report for managers, wishing to see which showrooms have which franchises. This shortcut join would not use the Rental or Sales contexts. Instead it would go directly from Showroom to Maker, as the shortcut join takes precedence over any other join. However applying a shortcut join here is not possible due to the keys set up in the tables. A linking table between Showroom and Maker, together with a new context, will be required to return the same results.
163
To create a shortcut join

1. Identify the two tables in a join path that can be linked directly. 2. Create a join between the two tables. 3. Double-click the new join. The Edit Join dialog box appears. 4. Set the correct cardinality. 5. Select the Shortcut Join option. Note: Note that this will not change anything in the operands or the expression field. 6. Click OK. The shortcut join now appears as a dotted line between the two selected tables.
Activity: Using contexts to resolve loops

Objective
Resolve loops by using contexts.
Instructions
In this workshop you will add new tables, insert new joins, and set cardinality, that will create loops in the Motors universe. You will then resolve the loops using contexts, and test them. 1. In Universe Designer, create the following aliased tables:
164
RENTAL (alias of SALE) RENTAL_MODEL (alias of SALE_MODEL) 2. Insert the table. RENTAL_PRICE_RANGE 3. Insert the following joins and set their cardinality.
Joins CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=RENTAL.CLIENT_ID
RENTAL.SALE_ID=RENTAL_MODEL.SALE_ID
RENTAL.SALE_TYPE='R'
RENTAL.SALE_DATE between FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_START and FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_END
RENTAL_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID=RENTAL.SHOWROOM_ID
RENTAL_MODEL.COLOUR_ID=COLOUR.COLOUR_ID
4. View loops using the loop detection tool. Tip: You should find 10 loops. 5. Resolve the loops by using the context detection tool. 6. Edit the RENTAL_MODEL context as follows: Change the name of the context to RENTALS. As a description for the context enter: "Returns information on cars rented". Remove the following join from the context list:
MODEL.MODEL_PRICE between SALES_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MIN and SALES_PRICE_RANGE.PRICE_RANGE_MAX
Add the following self-restricting join to the context:

165
7. Edit the SALE_MODEL context as follows: Change the name of the context to SALES. As a description for the context enter: "Returns information on cars sold". Remove the following join from the context list:
Add the following self-restricting join to the context:

SALE.SALE_TYPE='S'
8. Create a class called Rentals above the Sales class. 9. Create the following subclasses in the Rentals class: Rental Details Rental Dates Rental Figures 10.Create the following four objects in the appropriate subclass of the Rentals class:
Object Name SELECT Statement Object Description
Invoice ID Number
RENTAL.SALE_ID
Unique Invoice ID Number First day of Rental Total Rental Invoice Value
Rental Date
RENTAL.SALE_DATE
Rental Revenue
SUM(RENTAL.DAYS_RENTED* RENTAL_MODEL.SALE_QTY* MODEL.MODEL_DAYRENT* ((100 - RENTAL.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100))
11.Create a subclass called Day Rental Charges in the Car class. Then populate the subclass with the following objects.
166
Object Name
SELECT Statement
Object Description
Day Rental Range
RENTAL_PRICE_RANGE.RENT_RANGE
Description of Rental Charge banding
Model Day Rental Charge
MODEL.MODEL_DAYRENT
Standard Day Rental Charge
12.Save the universe, then test the contexts used to resolve the loops by building the following queries in Web Intelligence Rich Client: Showroom dimension and Sales Revenue measure objects. The inferred SELECT statement for this query should use the SALES context. Showroom dimension and Rental Revenue measure objects. The inferred SELECT statement for this query should use the RENTALS context. Showroom dimension, Sales Revenue and Rental Revenue measure objects. This query should infer two SELECT statements, one for each context. Showroom, Model, and Maker dimension objects. With this query, a dialog box should appear asking which context to use. 13.Insert the table named FRANCHISE in the universe structure. Insert the joins specified below and set cardinalities. SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID=FRANCHISE.SHOWROOM_ID FRANCHISE.MAKER_ID=MAKER.MAKER_ID 14.Detect contexts using the method of your choice. Tip: In this instance, it is unnecessary to remove existing contexts and redetect them as they are not affected by the FRANCHISE table and its joins. 15.Create the following object in the Showroom class, and then use it in a query to test that the context has resolved the loop correctly.
Object Name SELECT Statement Object Description
Franchises
MAKER.MAKER_NAME
Car manufacturers with which the showroom has a contracted dealership.
16.Check the integrity of the Motors universe with all options except Cardinality checked. Resolve any relevant divergence. 17.Insert the MODEL_COLOURS table and join it to MODEL and COLOUR tables, by inserting the following joins:
COLOUR.COLOUR_ID=MODEL_COLOURS.COLOUR_ID (1-N) MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL_COLOURS.MODEL_ID (1-N)
167
Adding this table, allows users to report on models of any color regardless of whether they are for sale or for rental. 18.Create a new model colors context. 19.In the Car class, create a new Colors detail object (associated to the Model dimension). 20.Save the Motors universe and close it.
168
Quiz: Resolving loops in a universe

1. What is the first step in resolving loops? 2. What causes a loop? 3. What are the two main methods of resolving loops? 4. What are the three types of queries you can use to test your contexts?
169
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Understand loops Resolve loops using aliases Resolve loops using contexts
170
Lesson 7
Resolving SQL Traps

Lesson introduction
This lesson deals with two common SQL Traps: Chasm and Fan. Chasm traps and fan traps are problems inherent in SQL that are caused by the order in which the elements of the SELECT statement are processed. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand SQL traps and universes Resolve fan traps Resolve chasm traps
Resolving SQL TrapsLearners Guide
171
Understanding SQL traps and universes

In order to avoid common SQL traps in your universe, it is important to understand how aggregates in queries may result in incorrect data. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Explain how SQL traps can cause queries to return inaccurate results
About SQL traps

Chasm traps and fan traps are problems inherent in SQL that are caused by the order in which the elements of the SELECT statement are processed. In SQL, a SELECT statement processes the SELECT, FROM, and WHERE clauses first (with the exception of any aggregates). In doing so, it creates a product of all the tables in the FROM clause on the basis of the joins and restrictions specified in the WHERE clause. This can be thought of as a virtual table. Normally this does not cause a problem, but if an aggregate is applied then it may, in particular circumstances, result in wrong output being generated. This is particularly worrying because SQL does not produce an error message, it just projects the results. Unlike loops that return fewer rows than expected, chasm traps and fan traps return too many rows. Fortunately, there are ways of identifying situations in which chasm traps and fan traps can occur, and there are methods of resolving these situations.
172
Detecting and resolving chasm traps

This unit explains how chasm traps can occur in the universe structure and how to resolve them. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define a chasm trap Detect chasm traps in a universe structure Resolve chasm traps
Chasm traps
A chasm trap is a type of join path between three tables when two many-to-one joins converge on a single table, and there is no context in place that separates the converging join paths. You only get incorrect results when the following circumstances all exist simultaneously: 1. There is a many-to-one-to-many relationship between three tables in the universe structure. 2. The query includes objects based on the two many tables. 3. There are multiple rows returned for an object (usually a dimension) based on the "one" table. For example, in this diagram there is no loop, but the flow around the three tables is many-to-one-to-many.
Note: A chasm trap is not dependent on the object types. The query could be made up of only dimensions, only details, or only measures, or any combination of the three types with the many tables for a chasm to occur.
When a query that uses objects Y and Z is run, the inferred SQL includes tables B, C, and A that have a many-one-many relationship respectively. The chasm trap causes a query to
173
return every possible combination of rows for one measure with every possible combination of rows for the other measure. This results in the values for each object being multiplied by the other. The effect is similar to a Cartesian product but is known as a chasm trap. The chasm trap is resolved by executing separate SELECT statements for object Y and object Z.
Detecting chasm traps

Unlike loops, chasm traps are not detected automatically by Designer. However, you can detect them in one of the following ways: Analyze the one-to-many (1-N) join paths in your schema to detect chasm traps graphically. Select Tools Detect Contexts or click the Detect Contexts button to automatically detect and propose candidate contexts in your schema. Detect Contexts examines the many-to-one (1) joins in the schema and proposes contexts to separate the queries run on the table. This is the most effective way to ensure that your schema does not have a chasm trap. Add additional dimension or detail objects to display more information in the report. If there is a chasm trap, aggregated values will be doubled, alerting you to the problem. You can use Detect Contexts to detect and propose candidate contexts, and then examine the table where any two contexts diverge. The point where two contexts intersect is the source of a chasm trap. Any two tables that have multiple rows converging to a single row in the table with the one relationship may potentially cause a chasm trap.
The chasm trap scenario

This section demonstrates a chasm trap in the Motors universe, and proposes two solutions to the problem. In the diagram below, the Sale, Client and Rental (Sale) tables are joined by a many-to-one-to-many relationship.
174
The following objects in Motors reference the tables above:
In this scenario, the universe designer has not selected the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option in the Universe Parameters SQL tab.
A user creates a series of queries using these objects and gets inaccurate results.
175
The first two queries return the correct data, but combining Sales Revenue and Rental Revenue in the third query returns inaccurate results. To understand what is happening here, you need to examine the rows that are returned by the queries to make the aggregated figures. In this example, you can do this by adding the Sale Date and Rental Date objects to the queries to return individual transaction details. Notice that there are two sale transactions in the first table. There are also two rental transactions in the second table. If you add the dates to the combined query as in the third table, you can see why the sale and rental revenues have doubled.
The query returns every possible combination of sale rows with every possible combination of rental rows. Hence, the sale transactions each appear twice as do the rental transactions, and
176
as a result of this the aggregates have been multiplied by the number of related rows on the alternative many table. Where you have a many-one-many relationship for tables in the FROM clause, the resulting logical table produces something akin to a Cartesian product. Only then is aggregation applied. This is the reason for the chasm effect. The problem with chasm traps is that, unless you look at the detail rows, there is nothing to alert you to the situation.
Resolving chasm traps

To resolve a chasm trap, you need to make two separate queries and then combine the results. Depending on the type of objects defined for the fact tables and the type of end-user environment, you can use the following methods to resolve a chasm trap: Modify the SQL parameters for the universe so you can generate separate SQL queries for each measure. This method is not recommended as it only works with measures and will result in certain inefficiencies in processing. It does not generate separate queries for dimension or detail objects. Create a context for each fact table. This solution works in all cases and will not result in inefficiencies.
Using multiple SQL statements for each measure to resolve chasm traps
If you have only measure objects defined for both fact tables, then you can use the Universe Parameters option Multiple SQL statements for each measure. This forces the generation of separate SQL queries for each measure that is used in the query. It does not work for queries that do not contain measures. With the option Multiple SQL statements for each measure selected, Universe Designer will now make separate SQL SELECT statements for each measure object in the query.
177
The results in the report are now correct, as the query has automatically generated two SQL statements.
Using this option will resolve the chasm trap problem. However, there are drawbacks to using this method to resolve chasm traps.
To activate multiple SQL statements for each measure to resolve chasm traps
1. Select File Parameters from the menu bar or click the Parameter button. The Universe Parameters dialog box appears. 2. Click the SQL tab. 3. Click the Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure check box in the Multiple Paths zone to select this option.
178
4. Click OK. 5. Save the universe. 6. In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new query using a dimension object, and two measure objects from the many-to-one-to-many table relationship. 7. Run the query. The results in the report are now correct, as the query has automatically generated two SQL statements. 8. Access the SQL that is generated in the SQL Viewer by clicking the Edit Query button on the toolbar to open the Report Panel. 9. Click on the View SQL button. This displays the separate SQL Statements.
Drawbacks to the multiple SQL statements for each measure method

Using the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option will resolve the chasm trap problem. There are, however, two main drawbacks to using this method.
The results can be confusing

The SQL Parameter used specifies: Multiple SQL statements for each measure. One of the drawbacks is that it does not run separate SELECT statements if the query contains only dimension objects. The report contains a single block with the results displayed as a Cartesian product.
179
It is not that there is anything inaccurate about the dates, but the multiple occurrences will be confusing to users.
The query is inefficient

Another drawback is that any query including multiple measures will infer a separate SELECT statement for each measure irrespective of whether it is required or not.
To find a complete solution to chasm traps, you must use contexts.
Using contexts to resolve chasm traps

You can define a context for each table at the many end of the joins. In this example you could define a context from Client to Sale and from Client to Rental.
180
When you run a query that includes objects from both contexts, this creates two SELECT statements that are synchronized at run-time in Business Objects end-user query tools to prevent the creation of a Cartesian product. Creating contexts will always solve a chasm trap in a universe. When you have a many-to-one-to-many situation, always use a context.
To use contexts to resolve a chasm trap

1. Identify the potential chasm trap by analyzing the many-to-one-to-many join path relations in the schema. 2. Select Tools Automated Detection Detect Contexts from the menu bar or click the Detect Contexts button. The Candidate Contexts dialog box appears. 3. Select a proposed context in the Candidate Contexts list box and click Add to add it to the Accept Contexts list box. Click OK. 4. Repeat for other listed contexts. The new contexts are listed in the Contexts pane of the List View window. 5. Select File Parameters from the menu bar or click the Parameters button. The Universe Parameters dialog box appears. 6. Click the SQL tab. 7. Select the Multiple SQL for each Context check box to clear the option.
181
8. Click OK. When you run queries on the tables in the chasm trap, the query separates the SQL into what is compatible for separate SELECT statements.
Activity: Resolving chasm traps

Objective
Detect contexts to resolve a chasm trap in the universe structure.
Instructions
1. Create a new universe called Chasm.unv. Use the Motors_conn connection to connect to the Motors database. 2. Select File Parameters from the menu bar or click the Parameter button and select the SQL tab. 3. Clear the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option by clearing the check box. 4. Add the following tables: CLIENT SALE RENTAL (as an alias of the SALE table) 5. Create the following joins and set the cardinality: Join
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID
Cardinality 1:N 1:N 1:1 1:1
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=RENTAL.CLIENT_ID
SALE.SALE_TYPE='S'
6. Create two classes: one called Chasm Objects, and the other called Measures. 7. Add the following objects with the following syntax: Object SELECT Qualification
182
Client Name
CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME + ' , ' + CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME
Dimension
Sale Date Rental Date Sales Revenue Rental Revenue
SALE.SALE_DATE
Dimension Dimension Measure Measure
RENTAL.SALE_DATE
Sum(SALE.SALE_TOTAL)
Sum(RENTAL.SALE_TOTAL)
8. Perform an integrity check on: Check Universe Structure Parse Objects Parse Joins 9. Save the universe. 10.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new document with two control queries to display the correct sales and rental figures for Paul Brendt in the Chasm universe. In the first query, use the Sale Revenue, and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object, and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Brendt, Paul. In the second query, use the Rental Revenue, and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object, and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Brendt, Paul. 11.Click Run Queries and view the results in the report. What is the sale amount now? What is the rental amount? 12.In the same report add a new table by clicking the Edit Query button. Click Add Query, and create a new query using the Sale Revenue, Rental Revenue, and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object, and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Brendt, Paul. 13.Click View SQL to check the SQL statement generated. 14.Click Run Queries and select the Insert a table in the current report option. What is the sale amount in the new table? What is the rental amount in the new table? What happened to your figures?
183
15.Log out of Web Intelligence Rich Client. 16. In Universe Designer, edit the universe by clicking File Parameters SQL tab, and select the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option. 17.Save the universe. 18.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new document using the Sale Revenue, Rental Revenue, and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object, and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Brendt, Paul. Click View SQL to check the SQL statement generated. What is the sale amount? What is the rental amount in the new table? What happened to your figures? 19.Edit the query by clicking the Edit Query button on the toolbar. 20.Remove the Sales Revenue, and the Rental Revenue objects. Drag the Sale Date, and Rental Date objects into the Report Panel. Click Run Query. What happens to the SQL and to the results? 21.Log out of Web Intelligence Rich Client. 22. In Universe Designer, edit the universe by clicking File Parameters SQL tab and clear the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option again (clear the check box). 23.Insert the following contexts: Context Joins
Sale
SALE.SALE_TYPE='S'
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=RENTAL.CLIENT_ID
Rental
24.Save the universe. 25.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new query with the Client Name, Sales Revenue, and Rental Revenue objects. Select the Client Name object and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Brendt, Paul. What is the sale amount? What is the rental amount? What happened to your figures?
184
Detecting and resolving fan traps

This unit explains how fan traps can occur in the universe structure and how to resolve them. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define a fan trap Detect fan traps in the universe structure Resolve fan traps
Fan traps
Fan traps occur when there is a one-to-many join to a table that fans out into another one-to-many join to another table.
This is a common structure and will not normally result in a fan trap. You only get incorrect results from the fan trap when the query includes a measure object on the middle table (B) of the table path and an object (of any kind) from the subsequent table ). The trap only occurs where (due to the database design) a column in table B holds data values which are already a sum of those values held at table C. The results are normally noticeably wrong. When a query is run using objects Y and Z, the inferred SQL includes tables B and C which have a one-to-many relationship. This results in a value for the Y object being multiplied by the number of values of the Z object related to that Y object value. Like the chasm trap, the effect is similar to a Cartesian product. Like the chasm trap, the fan trap can be resolved by executing a separate SELECT statement for object Y and object Z. The alternate solution is to avoid it in the first place. You cannot automatically detect fan traps. You need to visually examine the direction of the cardinalities displayed in the table schema. If you have two tables that are referenced by measure objects and are joined in a series of many-to-one joins, then you may have a potential fan trap.
185
The fan trap scenario

This section demonstrates a fan trap in the Motors universe, and proposes solutions to the problem. In the diagram below, the Client and Sale tables are joined by a one-to-many-to-many relationship, as are the Sale and Sale_Model tables.
The fan trap problem becomes apparent in a query that aggregates both an object based on the Sale_Total column in the Sale table, and an object based on the Sale_Qty column in the Sale_Model table.
186
What happens in the fan trap

When you run the Test 1 query to report the Sales Revenue for a client, the measure is correctly aggregated. This is a simple aggregate from one table in the fan trap structure. However, if you also wanted to know the number of vehicles the client has purchased, and you included the Number of Cars Sold object in the query, you get an inflated value returned for Sales Revenue. To understand what is happening, you need to look at the rows that are returned. Since two different Model ID numbers are involved in the Sale Quantity (Number of Cars Sold), there are two rows returned. As with chasm traps, a single SELECT statement joins each Model ID row with the same Sales Revenue row, which gives you the doubled figure. There is nothing to alert you to the situation, unless you look at the detail rows.
Where you have a one-many-many relationship for tables in the FROM clause the resulting logical table produces something akin to a Cartesian product. Only then is aggregation applied. This is the reason for the fan effect.
Resolving fan traps

The recommended ways to solve a fan trap problem are: Alter the SQL parameters for the universe. Use a combination of aliases and contexts. Avoid the fan trap scenario.
Alter the SQL parameters for the universe

This method is not recommended as it only works for measure objects and may result in inefficiencies in processing the query. This resolution works the same for chasm and fan traps.
Use a combination of aliases and contexts

There are two possible situations which may require different solutions.
If you have... Then...
Three tables in a one-to-many relationship A dimension coming from the first table and measures
Create an alias for the table (on the many end of the join) containing the initial aggregation, joining it back to the non-aggregation table (on the one end of the join). Use the
187
If you have...
Then...
coming from the two subsequent tables
Detect Contexts tool to detect and propose a context for the alias table and a context for the original table. This is the most effective way to solve the fan trap problem because it works with measure and dimension objects and does not cause inefficiencies. Create an alias for the table containing the initial aggregation, joining it back to the original table and then use the Detect Contexts tool to detect and propose a context for the alias table and a context for the original table. Both of these methods solve the fan trap problem because they will work with both measure and dimension objects and do not cause inefficiencies. You will explore both in the following sections.
Note: However, to be more efficient still, using the two-table scenario, you could also use the @aggregate_aware function.
Two tables in a one-to-many relationship A dimension and a measure coming from the first table and a measure coming from the subsequent table(s)
Avoid the fan trap scenario

You can avoid the scenario in the first place by relating all measure objects in the universe to the same table in the universe structure. Avoid placing a measure on anything other than the last table in a table path, which is the table with the many cardinality attached to it.
Using aliases and contexts to resolve fan traps

You create an alias table for the table producing the aggregation and then detect and implement contexts to separate the query. This procedure is demonstrated in the diagram below:
In this scenario your schema would look similar to:
188
The SELECT clause of the Sales Revenue object needs to be edited, so that it refers to the alias table rather than the original Sale table. As with resolving a chasm trap problem, two contexts need to be created. In this example, a context for Sale, and a context for Sale_Model need to be defined. This allows for the results to be merged into a single microcube to produce the correct results.
Moreover, if you make a query which includes a dimension object on the lower table in the one-many-many path, you will not suffer the fan trap, even when that dimension object contains the same value for all rows related to the measure value. The fact that the measure and dimension objects are in separate contexts forces two separate SELECT statements, thus avoiding the problem.
To use aliases and contexts to resolve a fan trap

1. Identify the potential fan trap by analyzing the one-to-many-to-one-to-many join path relations in the schema. 2. Create an alias for the table that is producing the multiplied aggregation. 3. Create a join between the new alias table, and the table that holds the dimension information. 4. Set cardinality. 5. Set contexts. 6. Change the SELECT clause of the measure object so that it refers to the alias table rather than the original table.
189
7. Create a query using a measure object from the alias table and another measure from the subsequent table in the table path of the universe structure. This results in two SELECT statements and the data is merged into a single microcube to produce the correct results.
Scenario of a fan trap with two tables in a one-to-many relationship

The structure shown here involves two tables instead of three. In this example, both a dimension and measure object are from the same table, and another measure is from a table in a one-to-many relationship further along the universe structure.
To resolve this type of fan trap, you can: 1. Create an alias of table A. 2. Create a join from the alias An to table A and set cardinalities. 3. Set contexts B and A. 4. Edit object Y so that it refers to columns in the alias An rather than table A.
In the universe structure shown below, you have created an alias table of the Sale table and created a join between the alias and the original table. And two separate context have been defined. This is to separate the dimension in Sale from the measure, which will now refer to Sale_Alias.
190
To solve a fan trap involving only two tables

1. Create an alias of the table that contains both dimension and measure values. 2. Create a join between the new alias table, and the original table. 3. Force the cardinality for this join to N:1. 4. Set contexts. 5. Change the SELECT clause of the measure object so that it refers to the new alias table rather than the original table. 6. Save the universe. 7. In Web Intelligence Rich Client, test the solution using a dimension object from the original table, a measure object from the alias table, and a measure from the second table in the schema. When you look at the SQL in the SQL Viewer, there will be two SELECT statements.
Note: Aggregate awareness provides another solution to this problem.
191
Avoiding fan traps altogether

In certain situations, it is possible to avoid the fan trap completely, as shown in the diagram below. To avoid the trap, the database column in table B to which the Y measure object relates must represent a preaggregation of more detailed data in table C. If this is the case, you can change the code of the Y measure object so that it refers to table C. Hence, there is no longer a one-to-many relationship incurred.
This is the method used to avoid the fan trap in the Motors universe, when the Sales Revenue and Number of Cars Sold measure objects are included in the same query.
In the Motors universe you have created during this course, the Sales Revenue measure is not based on the total figure in the SALES table but on a number of columns from the Sale, Sale_Model and Model tables which are held in the database at the same level of granularity as the number of cars sold. Hence, no fan trap exists and the correct result will be obtained.
192
Note: Another method of resolving a less common form of fan trap is by using Aggregate Awareness.
Activity: Resolving fan traps

Objective
Detect contexts to resolve a fan trap in the universe structure.
Instructions
1. Create a universe called Fans.unv. Use the Motors_conn connection to connect to the Motors database. 2. Select File Parameters from the menu bar or click the Parameter button and select the SQL tab. 3. Clear the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option by clearing the check box. 4. Add the following tables: CLIENT SALE SALE_MODEL 5. Create the following joins and set the cardinality: Join
Cardinality 1:N 1:N 1:1
SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID
SALE.SALE_TYPE='S'
6. Create a class called Fan Objects. 7. Add the following objects with the following syntax: Object SELECT Qualification
193
Client Name
CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME + ' , ' + CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME
Dimension
Model ID Sale Quantity Sales Revenue
SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID
Dimension Measure Measure
Sum(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY)
Sum(SALE.SALE_TOTAL)
8. Perform an integrity check on: Check Universe Structure Parse Objects Parse Joins 9. Save the universe. 10.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new document using the Sales Revenue and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Crandall, Sean. 11.Click Run Query and view the results in the report. What is the sale amount? 12.Edit the query and add the Sale Quantity object. What is the sale amount now? What is the sale quantity? 13.Log out of Web Intelligence Rich Client. 14. In Universe Designer, edit the universe by clicking File Parameters SQL tab and select the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option. 15.Save the universe. 16.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new document using the Sales Revenue, Sale Quantity, and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Crandall, Sean. 17.Click Run Query and view the results in the report. What is the sale amount? What is the sale quantity? 18.Edit the query and add the Model ID object. What is the total sale amount? What is the total sale quantity?
194
How many different models were purchased? What happened to your figures? Tip: To retrieve the sum value, highlight the relevant measure column without highlighting the header, and select the Insert Sum toolbar icon. 19.Log out of Web Intelligence Rich Client. 20. In Universe Designer, edit the universe by clicking File Parameters SQL tab and clear the Multiple SQL statements for each measure option by clearing the check box. Select the Multiple SQL statements for each context option if it is not already selected. 21.Add an alias to the SALES table (SALES2). 22.Create the following joins:
Join CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE2.CLIENT_ID Cardinality
1:N 1:1
SALE2.SALE_TYPE='S'
Note: Force the cardinality on CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE2.CLIENT_ID join to 1:N. 23.Use the Detect Contexts button to detect contexts. Be sure you have the following contexts. You may have to edit the context by removing or adding joins.
Context Joins CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID
Sale Model
SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID SALE.SALE_TYPE='S'
CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE2.CLIENT_ID
Sale2
SALE2.SALE_TYPE='S'
24.Modify the definition of the object that is performing multiple aggregations so that it points to the alias table:
Object SELECT Qualification
195
Sale Revenue
Sum(SALE2.SALE_TOTAL)
Measure
25.Save the universe. 26.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new document using the Sales Revenue, Sale Quantity, and Client Name objects. Select the Client Name object and click the Apply a Quick Filter button. From the List of Values, select Crandall, Sean. 27.Click Run Query and view the results in the report. What is the total sale amount? What is the total sale quantity? How many different models were purchased? What happened to your figures?
196
Quiz: Resolving SQL traps

1. A chasm trap can occur when: 2. Describe two ways to resolve chasm traps. 3. Describe three ways to resolve fan traps.
197
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Understand SQL traps and universes Resolve fan traps Resolve chasm traps
198
Lesson 8
Applying Restrictions on Objects

Lesson introduction
This lesson will help you understand and use restrictions, which are conditions in SQL that set criteria to limit the data returned by a query. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Restrict the data returned by objects
Applying Restrictions on ObjectsLearners Guide
199
Restricting the data returned by objects

A restriction is a condition in SQL that sets criteria to limit the data returned by a query. You define restrictions on objects to limit the data available to users. Your reasons for limiting user access to data depend on the data requirements of the target user. A user may not need access to all the values returned by an object. You might also want to restrict user access to certain values for security reasons. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define data restrictions Apply data restrictions to objects Apply data restrictions using condition objects Apply restrictions to tables Apply data restrictions using the Tables button Apply each type of restriction
Defining data restrictions

The WHERE clause in an SQL statement restricts the number of rows that are returned by the query. So far in your universe design work, the WHERE clauses have only been populated by the joins you made between the tables in the Structure pane. The joins restrict the result sets, usually based on equality between tables and prevent Cartesian products. You can also use the WHERE clause to further restrict the data that is returned in a query in circumstances where you may want to limit certain users to query on a subset of the data. For example, the report below is an unrestricted block containing data for Clients from all Countries:
200
The WHERE clause for the query is created from the SQL inferred from the joins made in the Structure pane:
WHERE (COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID=REGION.COUNTRY_ID) AND (REGION.REGION_ID=CLIENT.REGION_ID) AND (SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID) AND (SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID) AND (CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID) AND (SALE.SALE_TYPE='S') AND (SALE.SALE_DATE between FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_START and FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_END)
Compare this with the following report, which is a restricted block containing data only for clients from the United Kingdom:
The WHERE clause for the query now has an extra line at the bottom. This is the restriction added by the designer that limits the return of data to UK Clients:
WHERE (COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID=REGION.COUNTRY_ID) AND (REGION.REGION_ID=CLIENT.REGION_ID) AND (SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID) AND (SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID) AND (CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID) AND (SALE.SALE_TYPE='S') AND (SALE.SALE_DATE between FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_START and FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_END) AND (COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME = United Kingdom
Methods of restricting data in end-user modules

Within the design of a universe, you can either: Force restrictions, which the end user cannot override: Object, Table, Conditional SELECT, Additional Joins Provide optional restrictions, which the end user can choose to apply: Condition Objects Remember that users can apply conditions themselves by way of the Report Panel. Therefore, avoid creating optional restrictions that are of a simple nature, as the end user should be capable of creating such conditions for themselves on a query-by-query basis. There are often problems associated with inferred restrictions, as will become evident during this module. You are therefore advised only to force restrictions where they are absolutely necessary.
201
To ensure that a restriction is always inferred when a particular object is used in an end-user query, place the restriction in the Where box of the Definition tab in the Edit Properties dialog box related to the object. You can do this when you create the object or you can add it later.
To apply a restriction to an object

1. Open the Edit Properties dialog box for the object and select the Definition tab. 2. Enter the restriction directly in the Where field, or via the Edit Where Clause dialog box by selecting the >> button. 3. Click OK. When you have created or edited your object to include a restriction, you should test it by running a new query using a BusinessObjects end-user query tool. Always view the inferred SQL to check whether the SELECT statement includes the restriction in the WHERE clause and has the desired effect. Remember to save your universe before doing this. The inferred SQL displays the restriction. The last line of the WHERE clause is taken from the object restriction.
Drawbacks to applying restrictions to objects

Only create restrictions against objects when it is absolutely necessary. For example, consider the situation where users of Motors need to make queries of only those cars that can be rented. In the Model table in the underlying Motors database, the distinguishing factor between cars that can be rented and those that are stocked for sale, is that the Model.Model_Dayrent column contains data for rental cars and is null for sale-only cars. To create an object to list cars for rental, the object would have to include the restriction: Model.Model_Dayrent is not null. If it is not necessary, do not create the restriction. To see why, consider the implications of creating a UK Clients object as illustrated:
202
The drawbacks are as follows: You would get a confusing proliferation of objects for end users because you would then need a French Clients object, a German Clients object, and so on. As these objects would all represent alternate restrictions, you would not be able to construct a logical default hierarchy, which end users make use of when drilling down. Although the UK Clients example is fairly clear, in many cases the restriction will not be obvious to the user simply from the name of the object: the details of the WHERE clause are not shown in the end-user interface. If two or more similarly restricted objects are included in the same query, the conflict between the WHERE clauses will cause no data to be returned. Consider the situation if a user wanted data for UK Clients and US Clients. You might think that including both the UK Clients and US Clients objects would meet that need. However, the inferred SQL for the query would include the following two lines:
AND (COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME = 'United Kingdom') AND (COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME = 'USA')
As no country satisfies both these conditions, no data is returned.
An alternative to applying restrictions to objects

There is an alternative to applying restrictions to objects without using WHERE clauses. You will still have multiple objects, but you will avoid the conflicts that affect the return of data in queries. This method involves using a conditional SELECT clause for the object instead of a WHERE clause.
203
For example, if you want to force users to select financial results by year, you could create a series of Sales Revenue objects (one for each year). Each object would be edited, starting from the standard sum aggregate used in the basic Sales Revenue SELECT statement:
You would apply the condition for each year using the database function that applies IF THEN ELSE logic. For Sales Revenue 2003, the SELECT statement would look like this:
Note: The Else value 0 is optional.
For Sales Revenue 2004, the SELECT statement would look like this:
Note: Many databases support the CASE function. Consult the documentation provided by your database vendor to see what types of conditional functions are supported.
After you have created or edited the objects, test them individually and together in a single query. When you view the SQL to check whether the inferred SELECT statement includes the conditional SELECT syntaxes, the SQL appears as follows:
When the query is run, the report looks similar to this:
204
The conditional SELECT statements have removed the problem of the conflicting WHERE clauses. The data correctly shows the 2003 and 2004 Sales Revenue for each client.
Restrictions using condition objects

A condition object, or predefined query filter, is a preset restriction created in Universe Designer that a user can choose whether or not to apply to a query. When users create queries they can create their own query filters to limit the data returned by the query. They can also use the predefined query filters that the universe designer may have built into the universe to make it easier for them to restrict the data. In Web Intelligence Rich Client, the predefined query filter built into the universe can be viewed in the Report Manager Data tab, identified as predefined query filters. For example, if the designer has created condition objects for French Clients and UK Clients, the Predefined Conditions tab would contain these condition objects:
When you have created a condition object in Universe Designer, test it in Web Intelligence Rich Client by making a query that uses the filter. View the SQL to check that the inferred SELECT statement includes the restriction in the WHERE clause and has the desired effect.
The advantages of using condition objects

Useful for complex or frequently used conditions Gives users the choice of applying the condition
205
No need for multiple objects Condition objects do not change the user view of the dimension objects in the Classes and Objects tab in the Web Intelligence Rich Client Report Panel
To create a condition object

1. In Universe Designer, select the Filter option button at the bottom of the Universe pane. The Universe pane changes to show the Condition Object View. Note: Objects are not shown in the Condition Object View, but classes are. You add a condition object to a particular class. Also, be aware that deleting a class in the Condition Object View will delete that class from the whole universe, not just from this view. 2. Click the class in which you want to place the condition object. 3. There are two ways you can insert a condition: Select the Insert Condition on the Editing toolbar. Right-click the class and choose Condition from the drop-down menu. This opens the Edit Properties dialog box for condition objects. 4. In the Name field, enter a name for the condition object. 5. In the Description field, enter a help message for users describing the condition and any effect it will have on queries they make. 6. Enter the condition directly in the Where field or via the Edit Where Clause dialog box by selecting the >> button. 7. Click OK. 8. Save the universe. The new predefined condition object built into the universe can be viewed in Web Intelligence Rich Client in the Report Panel Data tab.
Applying restrictions using the tables button

If a table in your database has a flag that is used to switch between two or more domains, you can use this to apply restrictions at the table level. For example, the Sale table in the Motors database has a column called Sale_Type, which is used to distinguish between sales transactions and rentals transactions. The flag is set to S for sales or R for rentals. If you do not apply any restriction to this table, users running queries for sales (with appropriate objects) will get a resulting report that includes data on rentals as well as sales. Therefore, the results will be wrong. You can apply a restriction to this table using a self-restricting join. The self-restricting join appears as a stub join in the Structure pane:
206
The expression in the Edit Join dialog box is set as follows:
With this restriction in place, the data returned will be restricted to sales data, no matter where the table is used in the inferred SQL. For example, if the Sale table appears only in the FROM clause of the SQL, the restriction will still be applied in the WHERE clause. This is the main advantage of applying restrictions at the table level. A lookup table in a database can be used to provide a description for more than one dimension from a database. For example, in the Motors database, the Country table contains a single list of countries, but these include the country from which clients come, the country where a car showroom is located, and the country where a car maker is located. As a designer, you can create objects from the Country table for use in the Client class (for the Client Country), in the Showroom class (for the Showroom Country), and in the Car class (for the car Maker Country). We have done this in previous lessons and avoided loops by creating the appropriate alias tables.
207
If a user ran a query to answer the question: Which countries do our showrooms exist in?, you might think that a simple query using only the Showroom Country object in the Showroom class would provide the answer. However, in the current universe, such a query would actually infer SQL that returns all countries held in the Showroom_Country table.
SELECT SHOWROOM_COUNTRY.COUNTRY_NAME FROM SHOWROOM_COUNTRY
To solve this problem, the Showroom Country object in the Showroom class must be restricted so that it returns only country data relating to showrooms. This is done by specifying that whenever the Showroom Country object is used in a query, the Showroom table must also be inferred in the FROM clause of the SELECT statement. Providing that the Showroom_Country table is joined to the Showroom table (by intervening tables) using only equi-joins, the object is then guaranteed to only return countries in which showrooms exist.
To restrict data by adding tables to the object definition

1. Double-click the object you want to restrict. The Edit Properties dialog box for the selected object displays. 2. Click the Tables button. The Tables dialog box appears.
208
3. Scroll down the list of tables until you can see the table that is already highlighted. 4. Hold down the Ctrl key and click an additional table to force joins between the selected tables. 5. Click OK to close the Tables dialog box. 6. Click Apply in the Edit Properties dialog box. 7. Click OK.
Applying each type of restriction

Apply restrictions to objects when you need to force a restriction on users. Be aware of the drawbacks of multiple objects and conflicting restrictions. Use conditional SELECT statements instead. Use condition objects when you want to assist users by providing optional filters, and when it is important to avoid multiple objects and changes to the Classes and Objects view. Use self-restricting joins to apply restrictions to tables when you want the restriction to apply, irrespective of where the table is used in the SQL. This method is ideal when a table uses a flag to switch between two or more domains. Use additional joins when a lookup table serves more than one purpose in the universe. This method ensures that the user gets the correct answer to the question behind the query.
Activity: Applying restrictions

Objective
Apply enforced restrictions to objects and tables and create optional restrictions using condition objects.
Instructions
The sales staff of Prestige Motors needs to drill from Day Rental Range through Model Day Rental Charge to Model for Rental to deal with queries from potential customers. 1. Create a Model for Rental dimension object in the Day Rental Charges subclass. This object will have the same SELECT properties as the Model object. 2. Add a WHERE restriction to the Model for Rental object so that only models available for rent are returned. The restriction is:
MODEL.MODEL_DAYRENT IS NOT NULL
3. Create a US Clients dimension object in the Client class below the Client Name object with the settings: Type = Character Description = Returns only data for clients in the USA
209
Select syntax:
CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME + ', ' + CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME
Where syntax:
COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME = 'USA'
4. Create another object in the Client class for UK Clients. 5. Save the universe, then test the two new Client objects in Web Intelligence Rich Client: Build a query containing UK Clients, US Clients, and Sales Revenue objects The query returns no data because of the conflict of restrictions. 6. In Universe Designer, create a new subclass below the Sales class called Annual Revenue. Populate it with separate Sales Revenue measure objects for the calendar years 2003 and 2004 as indicated below. Use the CASE function to do this. 2003 Sales Revenue 2004 Sales Revenue 7. In the Annual Revenue subclass create two separate Sales Revenue measure objects related to financial years FY03-04 and FY04-05 as indicated below. Use the CASE function to do this. Sales Revenue for FY03-04 Sales Revenue for FY04-05 8. Save the universe, then test the two new calendar year Sales Revenue objects in Web Intelligence Rich Client: Build a query containing Showroom, 2003 Sales Revenue, and 2004 Sales Revenue objects. Replace 2003 Sales Revenue and 2004 Sales Revenue objects with the objects related to financial years FY03-04 and FY04-05, instead of calendar years. 9. Remove the US and UK objects in the Client class that you just created, and create the following condition objects instead: A condition object for US Clients A condition object for European Clients (excluding UK; UK clients are part of the Other Clients condition object) A condition object for Other Clients 10.Save the universe and test each restriction by building a query in Web Intelligence Rich Client. 11.Run a query using Showroom Country to see the list of countries that have showrooms. 12.In Universe Designer, edit the properties of the Showroom country object by adding the Showroom table to the list of tables associated with the object. Use the Tables button in the Edit Properties, Definition tab of the object to do this. 13.Save the universe. 14.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, run the above query again and compare the results.
210
15.In Universe Designer, ensure that the Client Country object will only return the countries in which clients exist, whichever query is run. Do this by adding the Client table to the list of tables associated with the object. 16.Edit the Maker Country object in the same way, to ensure that it only returns the countries in which car makers exist. 17.Edit the Franchise object so that it automatically infers the FRANCHISE context instead of prompting the user to choose among the SALES, RENTALS and FRANCHISE contexts. This allows end users to report on the franchises and their location regardless of sales or rentals information. Use the Tables button to highlight the MAKER and FRANCHISE tables. 18.Check the integrity of the universe. 19.Save the universe.
211
Quiz: Applying restrictions on objects

1. What is a restriction? 2. Explain two drawbacks of using restrictions at the object level. 3. When should you use self-restricting joins?
212
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Restrict the data returned by objects
213
214
Lesson 9
Using @functions with Objects

Lesson introduction
This lesson will help you use the @functions to provide more flexible methods for specifying the SQL for an object. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use @functions
Using @functions with ObjectsLearners Guide
215
Using @functions
The @functions are located in the Functions panel of the Edit Select Statement and in the Edit Where Clause dialog boxes for objects. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define @functions Use the @prompt function Use the @select function Use the @where function Describe the @aggregate_aware function
Defining @functions
In the Edit Properties dialog box of an object, if you look in the Functions panel of either the Edit Select Statement dialog box or the Edit Where Clause dialog box, you will find a list of @functions. The most commonly used @functions are:
@prompt(,,,,,,) @select() @where() @aggregate_aware(,)
These functions can be applied in the Select and/or Where dialog boxes of objects.
@function @prompt @select @where @aggregate_aware Can be used in... Both Select and Where clauses Only to be used in Select clauses Only to be used in Where clauses Only to be used in Select clauses
The @functions are used to provide flexible methods of specifying SQL.
@prompt
The @prompt function is used by the designer to force the end user to enter a value for a restriction when a query is run which includes the object in which the @Prompt is specified. This is done by placing a restriction based on the @prompt in the Where field of the Edit Properties dialog box of an object. When the user runs a query including that object, a prompt dialog box appears requesting a value to be entered.
216
It can be useful when you want to force a restriction in the inferred SQL but do not want to preset the value of the condition. For example:
In the example, the object Model for Rental is to be used by a salesman to list the models that can be rented. However, different models are rented from different showrooms. Hence, you would want to restrict the returned list to cars rented from a single showroom. If you hard coded the restriction, you would need a separate object for each showroom in the universe. Using the @prompt, you need only one.
@prompt syntax
The @prompt syntax consists of seven parameters, separated by commas: Prompt Data type (A, N, or D) LOV pointer or hard-coded list Mono or multi Free, constrained, or primary_key Persistent or not persistent 'Default value':'key value'
Note: The first two parameters are mandatory, and the remaining parameters are optional. The first three parameters must be inside single quotes. The primary key, persistent/not persistent, and 'default value: key value', are newly added parameters in BusinessObjects XI 3.0.
217
Prompt
This is the text, or question, that appears in the prompt dialog box when the query is run. The text must be enclosed in single quotes.
Data type
Data type refers to a character to specify the type of data that will be returned: A for alphanumeric N for numeric D for date The specified character must be enclosed in single quotes.
List of values (optional)

There are two methods of specifying a list of values: A hard-coded list: Each value is separately enclosed in single quotes and separated by a comma and the whole list is enclosed in curly brackets. For example:
{'Australia', 'France', 'Japan', 'United Kingdom', 'USA'}
A pointer to a list of values from an existing object: This can be invoked by double-clicking the object whose list of values you want to use in the Classes and Objects pick list. This gives the class name and the object name, separated by a back-slash. It must be enclosed in single quotes. For example:
'Client\Country'
Mono or multi (optional)

Mono: Allows the user to select or enter a single value from the list of values. Multi: Allows the user to select or enter multiple values from the list of values.
Free, constrained, or primary_key (optional)

Free: Users can enter a value of their own, or pick one from the list of values. Constrained: Users can only choose a value from the list of values. Primary_key: The user enters a value or selects from the list of values. If the primary key parameter is present, the entered or displayed value is not used to generate the query. The associated key value from the index awareness column is used.
218
Persistent or not persistent (optional)

Persistent: When refreshing a document, the last values used in the prompt are displayed by default. Not persistent: When refreshing a document, no values previously used/selected in the prompt are displayed in the prompt by default.
'Default value':'key value' (optional)

The default values parameter is used to define default values presented to the user. You can define multiple default values. The syntax for each default value is: value:key. The colon (:) is the separator between the value and the key. When refreshing a document these values are displayed by default but if the persistent option is set, then the last values used in the prompt are used instead of the default values. If you specify the primary key parameter in the prompt definition, then you must provide the key value(s).
@prompt syntax examples

Examples of the different @prompt syntaxes that can be used are listed below: @prompt syntax, using the first five parameters:
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',mono,constrained)
Note: Make sure the syntax parses OK. When inserting the @prompt function in the Select dialog box, it automatically inserts seven commas. You may need to remove the remaining two commas in the @prompt syntax. @prompt syntax, using mono, constrained, persistent:
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',mono,constrained,persistent)
The above example uses the "persistent" option. When refreshing a document, the last values used in the prompt are displayed by default. @prompt syntax, using mono, constrained, not_persistent:
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',mono,constrained,not_persistent)
The above example uses the "not_persistent" option. When refreshing a document, no values used are displayed by default in the prompt. @prompt syntax, using multi, constrained, persistent:
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',multi,constrained,persistent)
The above example uses the "persistent" option. When refreshing a document, the last values used in the prompt are displayed by default. Combining this with the "multi" option allows the user to select or enter multiple values from the list of values.
219
@prompt syntax, using multi, constrained, not_persistent:

SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',multi,constrained,not_persistent)
The above example uses the "not_persistent" option. When refreshing a document, no values previously used/selected in the prompt are displayed by default in the prompt. Combining this with the "multi" option allows the user to select or enter multiple values from the list of values. @prompt syntax, using mono, and primary_key:
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',mono,primary_key)
The above example uses the "primary_key" option. When prompted the user enters or selects one value from the list of values, as the "mono" option is used. If the primary_key parameter is present, the entered or displayed value is not used to generate the query. The associated key value from the index awareness column is used instead. The function returns an integer value (index). The primary_key option in the @prompt function needs to be assigned to an integer or numeric database field, in this example, SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID. This can be done using index awareness. If the user selects "Prestige Sports Cars" from the list of values, the SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID value is used to generate the query:
SELECT sum(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 - SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT )/100) FROM MODEL INNER JOIN SALE_MODEL ON (SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID) INNER JOIN SALE ON (SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID) INNER JOIN SHOWROOM ON (SALE.SHOWROOM_ID=SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID) WHERE (SALE.SALE_TYPE='S') AND (SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID = 2 )
@prompt syntax, using multi, and primary_key:

SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',multi,primary_key)
The above example uses the "primary_key" option. When prompted the user enters or selects one or more values from the list of values, as the "multi" option is used. If the primary_key parameter is present, the entered or displayed value is not used to generate the query. The associated key value from the index awareness column is used instead. The function returns an integer value (index). The primary_key option in the @prompt function needs to be assigned to an integer or numeric database field, in this example, SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID. This can be done using index awareness. If the user selects all showrooms from the list of values, the SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID value is used to generate the query:
SELECT sum(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 - SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT )/100) FROM MODEL INNER JOIN SALE_MODEL ON (SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID) INNER JOIN SALE ON (SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID) INNER JOIN SHOWROOM ON (SALE.SHOWROOM_ID=SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID) WHERE
220
(SALE.SALE_TYPE='S') AND (SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID IN (1, 2, 3) )
@prompt syntax, using multi, primary_key, not_persistent, and 'default value':

SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @Prompt('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',multi,primary_key,not_persistent, {'Prestige Cars' : '1', 'Prestige Sports Cars' : '2','Prestige Motors' : '3'})
When prompted the user enters or selects one or more values from the list of values, as the "multi" option is used. If the primary_key parameter is present, the entered or displayed value is not used to generate the query. The associated key value from the index awareness column is used instead. Not_persistent is used, and no values previously used/selected in the prompt are displayed in the prompt. Instead, when refreshing the report, the values specified in the "default value" option are displayed. If the user selects all showrooms from the default values in the list, the SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID value is used to generate the query:
SELECT sum(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *( 100 - SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT )/100 ) FROM MODEL INNER JOIN SALE_MODEL ON (SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID=MODEL.MODEL_ID) INNER JOIN SALE ON (SALE.SALE_ID=SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID) INNER JOIN SHOWROOM ON (SALE.SHOWROOM_ID=SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID) WHERE (SALE.SALE_TYPE='S') AND (SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_ID IN (1, 2, 3) )
@select
The @select function is a pointer to the Select dialog box properties of another object. It is used by placing the @select in the Select field of the Edit Properties dialog box of an object, using the following syntax:
@select(path of existing object)
You specify the path in the form Class_Name\Object_Name. The purpose of the @select function is to allow you to reuse existing code, giving the advantage of having to specify SQL code only once. Specifying SQL only once has two key advantages: You need to maintain only one instance of the SQL code. It ensures consistency of the code. For example:
221
This shows how the @select works. The code in the SELECT properties of the Model object is:
MODEL.MODEL_NAME+' ' + MODEL.MODEL_TRIM+' '+MODEL.MODEL_ENGINE
If you wish to create a new object called Model for Rental with the same code, rather than creating the same code twice, you can refer to the original Model object via the @select function:
@select(Car\Model)
222
The benefit is that a dynamic link is created between the objects. When changes occur in the SELECT statement of the original object, the changes are reflected in the SELECT statement of any other objects that refer to it via the @select function. Therefore, when you change the code, you only change it once in the original object.
@where
The @where function is a pointer to the Where dialog box properties of another object. It is used by placing the @where in the Where field of the Edit Properties dialog box of an object, using the following syntax:
@where(path of existing object)
For example:
223
This shows how the @where works. The code in the Where properties of the Model for Rental object is:
MODEL.MODEL_DAYRENT IS NOT NULL AND SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @prompt('Enter Showroom Name', 'A','Showroom\Showroom',mono, constrained)
If you wish to create a new object called Showroom Rental Model that has to contain the same WHERE syntax, rather than creating the same code twice, you can refer to the original Model for Rental object via the @where function:
@where(Day Rental Charges\Model for Rental)
224
The benefit is that a dynamic link is created between the objects. When changes occur in the WHERE statement of the original object, the changes are reflected in the WHERE statement of any other objects that refer to it via the @where function. Therefore, when you need to change the syntax, you only change it once in the original object.
Note: You can use the @where function in a condition object to point to an object, but not the other way around.
As with @select, its purpose is to allow you to reuse existing code, and it has the same advantages: You need to maintain only one instance of the SQL code. It ensures consistency of the code.
There are further benefits for using the @where function. If there are a number of objects and/or condition objects that require the same restrictions to be placed upon them, you could use a WHERE restriction object strategy to make the most efficient use of that restrictions code.
225
The idea behind the strategy is that you create a new and separate object for every restriction required, in a separate class to the normal object classes. Then, within the original objects, whenever a restriction is required, you point to the appropriate WHERE restriction object using the @where function. In the previous example, you can see that two Where clause restriction objects have been created that contain only a name and Where clause restriction, as follows:
Rental model
Showroom choice
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @prompt ('Enter Showroom Name','A', 'Showroom\Showroom',mono, constrained)
Note that each of the Where clause restriction objects do not have SELECT properties specified. The @where pointer can now be used to specify the restrictions required for the object called Model for Rental without the need to double up on the WHERE syntax. Also, by specifying each restriction in a separate Where clause restriction object, the strategy has enabled you to build up the multiple restrictions on the object one step at a time. This is particularly useful when creating complex restrictions on an object. Moreover, the individual restrictions can be used for other objects and condition objects. In the example above, the Where clause restriction object called Showroom Choice has also been used for the Showroom condition object. For this strategy to work, you need to be able to hide the class containing all the Where clause restriction objects from end users. The Where clause restriction object strategy has a number of advantages: Maintenance is easy because only a single instance of each restriction is required. The restrictions are easy to find. They are all under a single class. Restrictions can be mixed and matched without the need for repetition.
To hide the class containing all the Where clause restriction objects from end users
1. Click the class or object you want to hide. 2. There are different ways to hide classes and objects: Select the Show or Hide Item button on the Edit menu. Right-click the object or class and select Hide Item(s) from the drop-down menu. Use Ctrl+Shift+H. Hidden classes and objects appear in italics in the Universe Designer Universe pane. They are not shown at all in Business Objects end-user querying tools.
226
@aggregate_aware
Some databases contain Summary Tables. These tables are created by the Database Administrator (DBA) and contain figures such as revenue aggregated to a high level (year, for example) rather than to the fact/event level. The summary tables are usually populated and updated regularly by an automated program that runs SQL against the fact or event data at transaction level. This means that there are two methods that you can use to return aggregated data: Run a SELECT statement for the fact or event data Run a SELECT statement for the summary data Where possible, it is best to choose the latter method as the statement will process quicker. In Universe Designer, you can use a function called @aggregate_aware in the SELECT statement for an object, so that both methods are referenced. This function directs a query to run against aggregate tables whenever possible. If the data in the aggregate table is not calculated at the level of granularity required to run the query, the object will direct the query to run against the tables containing the non-aggregated data. A universe that has one or more objects with alternate definitions based on aggregate tables is said to be aggregate aware. These definitions correspond to levels of aggregation. For example, an object called Profit can be aggregated by month, by quarter, or by year. The reliability and usefulness of aggregate awareness in a universe depends on the accuracy of the aggregate tables. They must be refreshed at the same time as all fact tables. When you apply the @aggregate_aware function, be aware of the available levels, and be clear about the descending order of aggregation. Each aggregation level SELECT statement is separated by a comma, and the entire expression is enclosed in brackets. The final SELECT statement must be valid for all queries.
@aggregate_aware(<SELECT statement for highest agg level>, <SELECT statement for second highest agg level>, .. <SELECT statement for second lowest agg level>, <original SELECT statement for basic agg calculation>)
Applying aggregate awareness to objects in a BusinessObjects universe involves a four-step procedure: Step 1: Insert one or more summary tables in the universe structure. Set joins and cardinality. Step 2: Set the contexts. Step 3: Redefine the objects using @aggregate_aware. Step 4: Define incompatible objects using Aggregate Navigation.
Note: For more information, refer to the BusinessObjects XI 3.0: Designers Guide.
227
Activity: Using @functions

Objective
Apply @functions to objects and condition objects.
Instructions
Continue to work with the Model for Rental dimension object that you created in the Day Rental Charges subclass. This object returns all models available for rental. This is to be used by sales staff and requires further restriction to a specific showroom. 1. Add the following @prompt syntax in the WHERE clause of the Model for Rental dimension:
SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @prompt ('Select showroom name','A','Showroom\Showroom',mono,constrained)
Note: Parse the syntax. When inserting the @prompt function in the Select dialog box, it automatically inserts seven commas. You may need to remove the remaining two commas in the @prompt syntax, to make the syntax parse OK. 2. The SELECT properties of the Model and Model for Rental objects are the same. Use the @select in the Model for Rental object to point to the SELECT properties of the Model object. 3. Create a new condition object called Showroom Rental Model in the Showroom class. The Where clause restrictions for this condition already exist in the Model for Rental object. Use the @where function in the condition object to point to the where properties of the Model for Rental object. 4. Create a new class called Where Restriction Objects. 5. Create two new objects to go into the Where Restriction Objects Class as follows: Rental Model containing the restriction:
Showroom Choice containing the restriction:

SHOWROOM.SHOWROOM_NAME = @prompt ('Select showroom name','A','Showroom\Showroom',mono,constrained)
Note: Parse the syntax. When inserting the @prompt function in the Select dialog box, it automatically inserts seven commas. You may need to remove the remaining two commas in the @prompt syntax, to make the syntax parse OK. 6. Hide the Where Restriction Objects Class. 7. Edit the following object and condition object so that the WHERE clause of each contains no SQL code, but instead uses @where functions to point to the Where clause restriction objects. Model for Rental object inherits the Rental Model objects WHERE clause. Showroom Rental Model condition object inherits the Showroom Choice objects WHERE clause, and it should also point to the Rental Model object in the same hidden class to ensure they are rentals that are returned.
228
8. Create a Maker Choice condition object under the Car class that, when used in a query, produces a prompt dialog box requesting the user to enter a single manufacturer. 9. Check the integrity of the universe. Note: The Integrity Check dialog box alerts you regarding the two hidden objects. 10.Save the universe. Note: Remember to test your solution in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
229
Quiz: Using @functions with objects

1. What parameter does the @select require? 2. True or False. You can use the @where function in a condition object to point to an object, but not the other way around. 3. What function is used to create an interactive object that causes a message to appear at query runtime, that asks the user for specific input? a. @where b. @prompt c. @select d. @aggregate_aware 4. In the @prompt two parameters are mandatory and three are optional. What parameters are optional?
230
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Use @functions
231
232
Lesson 10
Using Hierarchies
Lesson introduction
Hierarchies allow you to organize dimension objects so that users can perform multi-dimensional analysis using drill mode in end-user queries. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand hierarchies and universes Work with hierarchies
Using HierarchiesLearners Guide
233
Understanding hierarchies and universes

Hierarchies in universes allow users to create reports that are enabled for multi-dimensional analysis with drill mode. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Explain how hierarchies allow users to drill down to different levels of detail using drill mode in end-user queries
Hierarchies
A hierarchy is an ordered series of related dimension objects that are used for multi-dimensional analysis. For example, a geographical hierarchy could group together dimension objects such as Country, Region and City. Multi-dimensional analysis is a technique for manipulating data so that it can be viewed from different perspectives and at different levels of detail. In Business Objects end-user querying tools, users can analyze data at different levels of detail using a feature known as drill mode. The example below shows a hierarchy of the dimension objects Country, Region and City. At the highest level, the user will see a Country. At the next level down, the Country is broken down into more detail: the regions. At the next lower level, the regions are broken down into more detail: the towns. A user can then analyze a measure object, such as Sales Revenue, against any of the levels in the hierarchy.
Natural hierarchies
A natural hierarchy is one that follows a naturally occurring pattern from the most general at the highest level to the most detailed at the lowest level. Examples of natural hierarchies can be found in the geographical definitions of places and in the measurement of time: Country, Region, State, City, District, Street Year, Quarter, Month, Week, Day
Logical hierarchies
BusinessObjects hierarchies are not restricted to natural hierarchies. You can construct a hierarchy from any related group of dimension objects that will create a sensible analysis path. The relationship between the dimension objects in a hierarchy normally will be one-to-many as you descend through the levels.
234
For example, one Country has many Towns; one Town has many Showrooms; one Showroom has many Franchises.
235
Working with hierarchies

After completing this unit, you will be able to: View default hierarchies in a universe Set the scope of analysis in a Web Intelligence Rich Client document using a default hierarchy Create a custom hierarchy Create time hierarchies
Default hierarchies
A default hierarchy contains all the dimension objects in a class in the order they are presented in that class. It is based on the order of the objects within the class. As the name suggests, a default hierarchy is automatically inferred by Business Objects end-user querying tools whenever you have at least one dimension object in a class. It is therefore important to organize dimension objects hierarchically in a class. In this example, you can see that the dimension objects in each class follow an order from the most general to the most specific.
Using this method of organizing your dimension objects in their classes is the key to setting up usable default hierarchies.
236
To view the Default Hierarchies

1. There are two methods to view the default hierarchies: Select Tools Hierarchies from the menu bar. Click the Hierarchies toolbar button. This opens the Hierarchies Editor dialog box:
You cannot add or remove objects from classes in the Hierarchies Editor. You can use the Hierarchies Editor to create Custom Hierarchies. 2. Click the + box next to any class if you want to see the dimension objects organized in these hierarchies. 3. Click Cancel to close the Hierarchies Editor dialog box.
To test a default hierarchy

As with other components of a universe, hierarchies can be tested in Web Intelligence Rich Client, to check that they function as expected. 1. In Web Intelligence Rich Client, create a new document. Select the relevant universe. 2. In the Query Panel, select an object that is the highest level of one of the hierarchies, and move it into the Result Objects pane. 3. Select a suitable measure object, and double-click it to add it to the Result Objects pane. 4. Click the Show/Hide Scope of Analysis pane button on the Web Intelligence Rich Client Query Panel toolbar.
237
This opens the Scope of Analysis pane.
The Scope of Analysis pane allows users to set up the query for drill analysis. All the dimensions selected for the query are highlighted here, within their default hierarchies. In order to allow users to drill down the hierarchy from one level to another, without having to modify the query, you can set the scope of analysis before the query is actually executed. Note: You can manually drag the objects you want to drill down to in this pane. In this case, the Custom value appears in the Scope of Analysis level drop-down list.
5. To define default levels of scope of analysis, select the level drop-down list in the Scope of Analysis, and click the arrow to select the scope of analysis levels. The levels you define in the scope of analysis will determine how many objects from the hierarchy will be included in the query, and therefore how many levels of detailed data will be returned to the Web Intelligence Rich Client document.
6. Select the required level from the drop-down list. The Scope of Analysis pane will contain further dimensions, indicating the level down option you have just selected. This means that they will be included in the query, and the measure relevant to these two objects will be calculated and stored in the documents microcube. 7. Click Run Query to execute the query. Values returned by the two dimension objects will not immediately be projected in the table that is displayed, but the objects can be seen listed in the Data tab of the Report Manager on the side. As soon as a user decides to switch to drill mode, the data will be available for drill analysis. 8. Click the Drill button in the Reporting toolbar to display the report in drill mode. Note: The report tab at the bottom of the Rich Client main window now shows the name Report 1 with a drill mode icon.
238
9. Move the mouse pointer over a value in the dimension object column. A flag appears indicating the next level of data available from the hierarchy.
10.Double-click to drill down. The data in the measure column is aggregated to reflect next level drill-down figures.
11.Drill down and up as you wish to explore the data available in the documents microcube.
Custom hierarchies
A custom hierarchy combines objects from default hierarchies to build a custom analysis path.
Default hierarchies are based on the order of the dimension objects in their classes. These default hierarchies may not provide the drill paths that users need to analyze their data. They may need to follow drill paths that contain dimension objects from more than one class. For example, if users of the Motors universe wanted to look at Sales Revenue from the point of view of Client/Area and Financial Period, they would not be able to do this using the default hierarchies.
239
As universe designer, you can build a permanent custom hierarchy as part of the universe. As a result, the hierarchy is available across documents to all users. In the analysis phase of the universe development process, the designer identifies those custom hierarchies that are to be used regularly and creates them in Universe Designer as permanent custom hierarchies.
To create a custom hierarchy

1. There are two methods to create a custom hierarchy: Select Tools Hierarchies from the menu bar. Click the Hierarchies toolbar button. This opens the Hierarchies Editor dialog box: 2. Click New. A new folder appears in the Custom Hierarchies pane. 3. Type a name for the custom hierarchy as the folder name, and press Enter. 4. In the left panel of the Hierarchies Editor dialog box, click the + box of the default hierarchies that contain the dimension objects you want to include in the custom hierarchy. The default hierarchy dimension objects appear. 5. There are several methods to add the dimension objects to the custom hierarchy: Select the object that you want to appear in the custom hierarchy, and click Add. Select multiple objects by holding the Ctrl key down, and click Add. Drag and drop the required objects to the new custom hierarchy folder. The selected objects appear in the custom hierarchy. Note: The dimension objects may not be in the order you require. You can move the objects up and down the list by clicking them and then clicking the Move Up or Move Down buttons. Alternately, you can use the drag-and-drop technique. 6. Click OK to save the changes to the hierarchies and close the Hierarchies Editor dialog box. 7. Save the universe.
The effect of custom hierarchies on default hierarchies

In Web Intelligence Rich Client, if you switch the Query Panel's Data tab to Display by hierarchies mode, before you create any Custom Hierarchies in Universe Designer, you will see that the list of hierarchies is shown in the same order as the objects in the Display by objects mode: both show a full list of default hierarchies. However, when you create a Custom Hierarchy, the Display by hierarchies mode lists only the custom hierarchies while the Display by objects mode shows all objects made available to the user.
240
At first, this appears to be a problem. However, the effect of creating a custom hierarchy is actually very useful because it provides a mechanism for selectively producing hierarchies for end users. Because a default hierarchy is always created for any class where a dimension object exists, it may be that there are some default hierarchies that you do not want users to use as drill paths. This mechanism can be used to exclude such default hierarchies. Once you decide to create custom hierarchies, you must copy any of the defaults that you want to keep over to the right-hand side list box. Even if you do not want to create new ones, to exclude the default hierarchies that you do not want users to use as drill paths, you must copy the useful ones over. In order to make any change at all in the hierarchies, you either start over by creating new custom hierarchies or you copy only the useful default hierarchies into the Custom Hierarchies list box.
To selectively make default hierarchies available to users

This topic discusses how to add selected default hierarchies to the list of custom hierarchies in Universe Designer. 1. There are two methods to create a custom hierarchy:
241
Select Tools Hierarchies from the menu bar. Click the Hierarchies toolbar button. This opens the Hierarchies Editor dialog box. 2. Drag and drop only the default hierarchy folders you want the users to use as drill paths from the left panel of the Hierarchies Editor dialog box to the right panel.
Note: When more than one hierarchy starts with the same dimension object path but diverges at a lower level of the hierarchy, the default path in the user module will be the one that is higher in the list (if dimensions from both hierarchies are included in the query). You can alter this default priority by changing the order of the hierarchies in the Custom Hierarchies pane. You can do this using the Move Up and Move Down buttons, or using the drag-and-drop technique. Note: When you add default hierarchies to the Custom Hierarchies list, it is good practice to position the true custom hierarchy, if any, at the bottom of the list. 3. Click OK to save the changes to the hierarchies and close the Hierarchies Editor dialog box. 4. Save the universe.
Time hierarchies
One of the most common requirements for data analysis is to provide facilities for analysis against different time periods. Time is a special case because all the information for the dimension objects that make up the hierarchy can come from a single column in a database. In most other cases, each dimension object infers a separate database column.
242
This is achieved by using SQL date scalar functions to extract the day, month, year, and possibly quarter from a single database column of a date type. When you create a Time Hierarchy, you are still creating a Default Hierarchy, in which the levels depend on the order of the Dimension objects. You create the standard time structure by ordering the objects Year, Quarter, Month, and Week. The only difference with Time Hierarchies is the way in which you create the objects.
Creating time hierarchies

There are three methods of creating a time hierarchy. Each method has advantages and disadvantages for both the designer and the user. The three methods are: Automatic time hierarchies Using database functions Table-based time hierarchies
To create an automatic time hierarchy

Using this method, Universe Designer automatically creates the dimension object definitions needed for a time hierarchy from a single Date Seed object. Automatic time hierarchies can only be applied to objects with Date type. 1. Double-click a date object to open the Edit Properties dialog box. Note that the Type field is set to Date. 2. Click the Properties tab. With the field type set to Date, the Automatic Time Hierarchy button is shown in the Qualification pane.
243
3. Click the Automatic Time Hierarchy button to open the Automatic Time Hierarchy dialog box.
4. Select the check boxes for the time-related dimension objects you want to create and edit the names of the dimension objects, if required. 5. Click OK to close the Automatic Time Hierarchy dialog box. 6. If necessary, alter other object properties as required. 7. Click OK to close the Edit Properties dialog box. In the Universe pane, the original date object has a plus next to it, indicating that other objects are attached to it. These are the automatically created time dimension objects.
8. Click the + box to view and check the objects attached to the date object.
Note: You can see that the arrangement of the objects is not as you might expect. The original date object is at the top of the hierarchy, and the other time objects appear to be subsidiary objects to it. From this, it is apparent that there are two further disadvantages to this method of creating time dimension objects. First, when a user sees a + box against an object, they will think that detail objects are attached to it. Second, the objects are not ordered hierarchically in the class, and, as a consequence, this might lead to confusion as to which is the highest-level object in the class. 9. Double-click one of the automatically created time dimension objects (year, quarter, or month) to view the Edit Properties dialog box for the object.
244
Note: The object properties cannot be edited. This is another disadvantage. However, you can also see one of the key advantages of using this method to create time dimension objects: the SQL inferred includes the scalar function used to extract the correct element of the date. 10.Click OK to close the Edit Properties dialog box. 11.Click the Hierarchies toolbar button to open the Hierarchies Editor dialog box. Notice that in the Default Hierarchies list, there are two new default hierarchy classes, an empty one bearing the name of the original class, and another bearing the name of the class appended with the name of the original date object. 12.Click the + box next to the class/object-named default hierarchy. You can see that the time hierarchy objects are correctly ordered despite the order of the dimension objects in the class. 13.Close the Hierarchies Editor dialog box. 14.Save the universe.
Testing automatic time hierarchies

Automatic time hierarchies are tested in the same way as any other hierarchy. However, there is one thing to note about such a test. When you drill down to the bottom of the time hierarchy, the Quarters and the Months are identified simply as numbers, 1 to 4 for the Quarters and 1 to 12 for the Months.
245
This can be confusing or unsatisfactory to end users. A better idea is to precede the numbers with a character string such as Quarter or Month. However, as you have already seen, it is impossible to edit a time dimension object that is created using the automated method.
Advantages and disadvantages of automatic time hierarchies

This section lists the advantages and disadvantages for using automatic time hierarchies.
Advantages
It is a fairly quick and easy way to set up a time hierarchy. Automatically creates the SQL SELECT statement using the appropriate scalar functions for the RDBMS of the target database.
Disadvantages
Does not give the designer any control over the layout of the dimension objects in the Universe pane. Does not give the designer any control over the format of the data in the query report. The layout of the dimension objects in the universe can be confusing to users, who normally expect to see detail objects under dimension objects. The format of the report can be confusing to users. An LOV can only be applied to the date seed object, not to individual time dimension objects. All the negative points listed above can be avoided if another method of creating time dimension objects is used.
Time hierarchies based on database functions

You can use the scalar date functions to create time dimension objects manually.
Note: However, the set of scalar functions used to extract elements of a database varies with each RDBMS.
To create a time hierarchy using database functions

1. Create a new class or subclass with an appropriate name.
246
Repeat the remainder of this procedure to create each time object required within the class that is based on the date scalar functions. 2. Drag the database column from the Structure pane table that contains the date required and drop it on the newly created class. 3. Double-click the object to open the Edit Properties dialog box. 4. Edit the properties of the object so that it will infer an element of the date as required. Change the object name to reflect the scalar function used. Change the Type if required, depending on the scalar function used. Change the SELECT statement to the relevant scalar function, string conversion, and required concatenated string value, depending on the RDBMS used. Clear the Associate list of values, if not required. 5. Click OK to close the Edit Properties dialog box. 6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 for each of the other time objects required within the class based on scalar functions. Tip: As you are creating a very similar time object to the previous one, it can be more efficient to edit a copy of the previous object, rather than creating a new one as suggested in step 2. 7. The Universe pane now contains a class or subclass as in the following example:
A default time hierarchy will now be inferred from the class.

Note: A time hierarchy created using this method is tested the same way as any other hierarchy.
Advantages and disadvantages of database function time hierarchies

This section lists the advantages and disadvantages for database function time hierarchies.
Advantages
The layout of the dimension object within the class is as a user would expect. Each of the objects can be edited individually. A separate LOV can be associated with each time dimension object, as required. The name of the hierarchy and the order of the objects mirror the class exactly.
247
Disadvantages
It takes longer to create the objects of the time hierarchy than when using the Automatic Time Hierarchy method. The person designing the universe needs to know the relevant scalar functions and how to use them. Tip: If you do not know the relevant scalar functions, you could initially create the time objects within a class using the Automatic Time Hierarchy method. Then you could note the scalar functions automatically inferred, remove the automatically created objects, and recreate them using the database function method.
Table-based time hierarchies

The Automatic Time Hierarchy and Database Functions methods of creating a time hierarchy are appropriate when you want to create calendar-based time dimension objects. However, they are inappropriate when you want to create time dimension objects based on different time periods.
Another way of creating time dimension objects is to add a time-range table to the database with columns and data as in the following example. This table can then be added to the structure and its columns used to create time dimension objects. This is a good way of coping with financial periods that do not coincide with the calendar year.
To create a table-based time hierarchy

1. Add the time period table to the universe structure. 2. Insert a theta join between the start and end range columns of the time period table and an appropriate date column of another table. An example of this is shown below:
248
3. Create a new class with an appropriate name. 4. Create the time objects required. In each instance, you will not need to use scalar functions. The SELECT statement of each object needs only to infer a database column name. Hence, it would be more efficient to use the automated method of creating objects (drag and drop). When the objects have been created, the class appears as in the example below:
A default time hierarchy will now be inferred from the class. 5. Save the universe.
Note: A time hierarchy created using this method is tested in the same way as any other hierarchy.
Advantages and disadvantages of table-based time hierarchies

This section lists the advantages and disadvantages of table-based time hierarchies .
Advantages
It is a good method of creating time dimension objects for time periods other than calendar periods. The layout of the dimensions within the class is as a user would expect. Each of the objects can be edited individually. A separate LOV can be associated with each time dimension object, as required. The name of the hierarchy and the order of objects mirror the class exactly.
Disadvantages
The additional join reduces the efficiency of an inferred SQL statement.
249
Activity: Using hierarchies

Objective
Infer default hierarchies and create custom hierarchies for the Motors universe. Note: Switch back to default hierarchies if you have followed along during this lesson.
Instructions
1. To view all hierarchies, click the hierarchy button. Remove all custom hierarchies in the Custom section. 2. Check that the hierarchical order of the dimension objects in the Client class is based on geography. The geographic hierarchy is: Country -> Region -> Area -> Town. 3. Save the universe, and then test the default hierarchy in Web Intelligence Rich Client. 4. Create a Sale Year, Sale Quarter, and Sale Month dimension object using the Automatic Time Hierarchy method. 5. Save the universe again, and then test the resulting hierarchy in Web Intelligence Rich Client. When you run the query, view the SQL and note the scalar function used. 6. Using the Automatic Time Hierarchy method poses some limitations. Remove the automatically created Sale Year, Sale Quarter, and Sale Month objects, and replace them with manually created objects, using numeric database scalar functions: Sales Year: {fn year(SALE.SALE_DATE)} Sales Quarter: {fn quarter(SALE.SALE_DATE)} Sales Month: {fn month(SALE.SALE_DATE)} 7. Create a Rental Year, Rental Quarter, and Rental Month dimension object manually in the Rental Dates subclass, using alphanumeric database scalar functions and formatting: Rental Year:
'Calendar Year ' + Datename(YYYY,RENTAL.SALE_DATE)
Rental Quarter:
'Q ' + Datename(Q,RENTAL.SALE_DATE)
Rental Month:
Datename(mm,RENTAL.SALE_DATE)
8. Check that the order of the dimension objects in the Financial Period class is based on time. 9. Save the universe again, and then test the resulting hierarchies in Web Intelligence Rich Client. 10.Prestige Motors wants to analyze clients geographically (by Country, Region, and Town) but then further analyze the breakdown of client expenditure by financial year.
250
Create a custom hierarchy to allow users to do this by including the Country, Region, Town and Financial Year objects in the hierarchy. 11.Make the following default hierarchies available to the user: Car Day Rental Charges Showroom Financial Period Rental Dates Sale Dates 12.Save the universe again, and then test the resulting hierarchy in Web Intelligence Rich Client. 13.Sales people want to drill down to a model using a specific drill path. In the bottom of your custom hierarchy list, create a hierarchy to allow this drill path using the following objects: Showroom Country Showroom Name Maker Model 14.Save the universe again, and then test the resulting hierarchy in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
251
Quiz: Using hierarchies

1. A _____________ hierarchy is the hierarchy based on the order of the objects within the class. a) Default b) Custom 2. What are two advantages of Automatic Time Hierarchies?
252
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Understand hierarchies and universes Work with hierarchies
253
254
Lesson 11
Using Lists of Values

Lesson introduction
This lesson explains how you can add, modify, or remove a list of values (LOV) for an object. It also introduces how to create a cascading list of values in Designer and how to use them in Web Intelligence Rich Client. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create a list of values Work with LOVs in Universe Designer Create a cascading LOV
Using Lists of ValuesLearners Guide
255
Creating a list of values

A list of values is a list that contains the distinct data values associated with an object. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Define a list of values (LOV) Use a list of values in Web Intelligence Rich Client
What is a list of values?

When you create a dimension or detail object in Universe Designer, it is automatically assigned an associated list of values, or LOV. This list does not physically exist when you create an object, but by default the object has the ability to query the database to return a list of its values when used to build a query. Lists of values are based on the results of a SELECT Distinct query on the column or columns held in the Select statement in the objects Edit Properties dialog box. If you select the Export with Universe option in the Associate a List of Values pane of the Properties tab, the list of values is converted to XML when you export the universe, and then stored in a .unw file in the Central Management Server (CMS). The first time a list of values is used to filter results returned by a query, the LOV is stored in an encrypted file on the local file server in the sessions folder. As you create objects in the universe, use the following questions as a guide to help you decide whether to associate an LOV to an object or not: Do the users need to see a list of values for this object? Are they likely to want to apply query filters or conditions on this object? Is the data dynamic or static? Will the data be updated frequently? How long will it take to run the SELECT Distinct query? What does the list need to include?
Using a list of values (LOV)

When users build queries, they can define query filters to restrict the amount of data returned by a specific object used in the query. To do this, they view the list of values for that object in order to specify which value(s) will be returned. The LOV for the object appears in the Filter or Editor, which helps the user choose the terms for the filter. For example, a manufacturer object with the SELECT clause for the manufacturer name column will have an LOV that contains all the available distinct car manufacturers names. A user who wants to limit the query to a single manufacturer could select that name for the query filter by choosing it from the LOV.
256
Working with LOVs in Universe Designer

A list of values is a list that contains the distinct data values associated with an object. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Associate an LOV with an object View the contents of an LOV Set options for generating an LOV Modify the contents of an LOV Create a hierarchical view of an LOV
Associating an LOV with an object

By default, an LOV is attached to every dimension and detail object that is created in Universe Designer. When you create a dimension or detail object in Universe Designer, it is automatically assigned an associated list of values, or LOV. This list does not physically exist when you create an object, but by default the object has the ability to query the database to return a list of its values when used to build a query. There are three things to keep in mind, as a universe designer, when deciding whether or not to associate an LOV to an object: An LOV is based on a SELECT Distinct query that is fired at the target database. This could have potential performance implications for the efficiency of Business Objects end-user querying tools. The only purpose for creating an LOV is to assist the end user in choosing an operand value for a query filter. The LOV only holds values that exist within the database. It is therefore recommended that you do not provide an LOV for the following types of objects: All measure objects. Any object where the LOV consists of a large number of values. Any object where the list on its own would be meaningless.
To view an objects default LOV properties

1. Double-click the object to open the Edit Properties dialog box for the object. 2. Click the Properties tab.
257
3. If you want to turn off the LOV for this object, click the Associate a List of Values check box to clear it.
To view the contents of an LOV in Universe Designer

1. Double-click the relevant object to open the Edit Properties dialog box. 2. Click the Properties tab. 3. In the Associate a List of Values zone, click the Display button. A SELECT Distinct query is fired at the target database and the LOV displays. 4. Click the Cancel button to close the window. To create a file to hold the contents of the LOV query in Universe Designer, use the same procedure, but instead of clicking Cancel at step 4, click OK. In that case, the list is saved as an .LOV file in the universe subfolder on the file system. The default location is the Universe subfolder of the default installation folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\<user_name>\Application Data\ Business Objects\Business Objects 12.0\Universes\@<server_name>\<universe_name>
The name of the LOV file is the same name as shown in the List Name field, in the Properties tab. As a designer, you can edit the list name to call the file anything you want (over 100 characters long), provided that the file ends in an .LOV extension. Clicking the Restore Default button changes the name back to the default file name.
258
Setting options for generating LOVs

By default, the first time that an LOV is used in a user login session, the system fires a query at the target database and uses the results to populate the list. Thereafter, the .LOV file from this query is referred to each time the LOV is used. However, you can alter the strategy for refreshing the list by selecting options from the Associate a List of Values zone, in the Edit Properties dialog box.
Note: The next section describes the following List of Values options: Automatic refresh before use option Export with universe option Delegate search option
Automatic refresh before use

If you select this check box, the system sends the SELECT Distinct query to the target database every time the user selects the LOV. This refreshes the contents of the list much more frequently than the default strategy, where the list is refreshed only the first time it is used in a user login session. It is recommended that you select the Automatic refresh before use check box if the contents of the list are dynamic and frequently changing. If the contents of the list are stable and unchanging, you can increase speed and efficiency by clearing this check box.
Export with universe

If you select the Export with universe check box, the list of values is converted to XML when the universe is exported, and stored in a .unw file. This file is stored in the BusinessObjects Central Management Server (CMS).
Delegate search
The Delegated list of values (LOV) search allows you to delegate the search of values in an LOV to the database. This feature: Prevents the LOV from loading automatically Restricts the data set returned Improves performance by limiting the load time Instead, the report user can perform a search for a pattern within the database.
259
This option can be helpful when using an SAP BW data source. An SAP BW query can contain more than ten variables, which means that ten or more lists of values can be loaded. Loading and refreshing lists of values can have an important impact on performance. The delegate search option on the list of values properties presents the user with an empty list of values at query run time. The user enters search criteria to limit the number of values returned in the list of values. Note: The delegated search is not supported for cascading lists of values.
Modifying the contents of the LOV

In Universe Designer, you can modify the contents of the list in two ways: Remove values from the list by creating a filter. Add data to the list by adding columns to the list. The remaining two options, Allow users to edit this list of values and Hierarchical Display, are not available for users creating reports with Web Intelligence and Web Intelligence Rich Client.
To apply a condition to an LOV

1. In Universe Designer, in the objects Edit Properties tab (in the Associate a List of Values zone), click Edit to the left of the Display button. The Universe Designer Query Panel displays, showing the default query for the LOV. The active object is listed in the Result Objects. 2. Drag an object that you want to serve as a condition on the list of values for the active object over to the Conditions pane. 3. Double-click an operator in the Operators pane. 4. Double-click an operand in the Operand pane. 5. Select or type values as required. 6. Click Run to save the condition and close the Universe Designer Query Panel. 7. Click Display to view the restricted list of values. If a blank list appears, click Refresh. The values appear in the list. 8. Click OK to accept the modified list. The .LOV file in the universe subfolder updates with the modified list. This is the LOV that the end users see when they use the edited object in a query.
Editing the LOVs for the entire universe

If you want to view all the objects in the universe that have LOVs associated with them, and possibly edit some of these LOVs at the same time, you can edit the lists from the Universe Designer Tools menu.
260
To edit the LOVs from the Tools menu

1. From the Tools menu in Universe Designer, select List of Values. 2. Select Edit a List of Values from the drop-down menu. The List of Values dialog box appears displaying all the objects in this universe that have an LOV associated with them. From here, you can select any of these objects to display, edit, purge and refresh their LOV.
3. Click the +box next to each class name displayed to see the objects in this universe that have an LOV associated with them. 4. Select an object from the list. 5. Click Display. The list of values for the selected object displays. 6. Click OK to close the List of Values dialog box. The Tools List of Values Edit List of Values option is useful if you want to edit all the LOVs in the universe at the same time, instead of displaying the Edit Properties dialog box for each object separately.
Adding data to the list by adding columns

The second way you can modify the LOV is to add more data to the list by adding columns to it. This helps end users to find the value they want. It is also an appropriate method for an LOV that contains a lot of values.
261
To add additional columns to an LOV

1. Double-click on an object to open the Edit Properties tab. 2. Click on the Properties tab. 3. Select Edit (in the Associate a List of Values zone). The Universe Designer Query Panel displays. 4. Drag the objects you want to place in the hierarchy into the Result Objects pane to the right of the existing object and place the respective sorts on them. 5. Click Run to save the LOV query and close the Universe Designer Query Panel. 6. In the Properties tab of the objects Edit Properties dialog box (in the Associate a List of Values zone), click the Display button to see the LOV. Note: If the list is blank, click the Refresh button to update the list.
262
Creating a cascading LOV

A cascading LOV is a feature in Universe Designer that allows you to associate an LOV to a series of objects defined in a hierarchy. When a user applies a prompted query filter to one of the objects used in the cascading LOV, Web Intelligence or Web Intelligence Rich Client prompts the user to select a value for each level of the hierarchy. This feature only applies to Web Intelligence XI R2 ,Web Intelligence XI 3.0, and Web Intelligence Rich Client XI 3.0. Note: You remove a cascading LOV in the same way that you remove an ordinary LOV, by editing the object properties and deleting the condition in the object definition. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Set up a cascading LOV Use the cascading LOV in Web Intelligence Rich Client
Setting up a cascading LOV

A cascading LOV is a sequence of lists of values associated with a hierarchy of objects in a universe. As universe designer, you define prompts for each hierarchy level and when the user adds one of the objects to a query, the query prompts the user to select a value for each level.
Universe designers build the prompt(s) in the object definition, and report designers and power users use it when they create and refresh reports using queries.
263
A universe designer defines the universe so that the user is always required to answer a series of prompts to specify the values in a hierarchy of dimensions to be displayed in the report. Only the data concerning the selected values is returned to the microcube. Users can create a query that builds one of the objects into a prompted query filter. The Prompts dialog box displays the list of values for all the objects you placed in the cascading LOV in Universe Designer, in reverse order.
To build a cascading LOV on an object

1. From the Tools menu in Universe Designer, select List of Values. 2. Select Create cascading Lists of Values from the drop-down menu. The Create Cascading List of Values dialog box appears. 3. Open the appropriate class and double-click the object to move it into the Cascading List of Values list. By default, text appears in the Prompt Text zone to set the text that users will see if this object is used in a prompted query filter after you add the next object. 4. Double-click additional objects that need to appear in hierarchical order in the cascading list of values. Edit the prompt text if required. 5. Verify that the Hierarchical View check box is selected.
264
6. Click Generate LOVs to create the list of values. If LOVs already exist for the selected objects, you will be prompted with a message asking whether you want to overwrite the existing values. 7. Click OK. The Create Cascading List of Values dialog box closes. 8. Save and export the universe.
To test the cascading LOV in Web Intelligence Rich Client

Now that you have assigned LOVs to objects that are grouped together in a hierarchy as a cascading LOV, you can create a query that builds one of the objects into a prompted query filter. 1. In Web Intelligence Rich Client, build a query and create a prompt on one of the objects in the cascading LOV. 2. Click Run Query. The Prompts dialog box appears. The Prompts dialog box displays the list of values for all the objects you placed in the cascading LOV in Universe Designer, in reverse order. Note: If you are sure you know the exact value that interests you, you can always type in the Type a value text box. 3. Scroll down the list of values and click the + box to expand that folder. 4. Expand the further + boxes to select the lowest level value for your query. The little arrow displayed next to the prompt text at the top of the Prompts dialog box changes to a green check mark and the value you have chosen appears in the prompt. 5. Click Run Query to create the report. The report displays the selected values.
Activity: Using a cascading LOV in Web Intelligence Rich Client

Objective
Associate a Cascading LOV to an object.
Instructions
1. In Universe Designer, create a cascading LOV using the objects in the Car class. 2. Save the universe. 3. Build a query in Web Intelligence Rich Client that shows the number of cars sold per showroom and prompts the users to select the Category of Car that they want to see in the report. Note: At the end of this activity, please remove the Cascading List of Values using the following steps:
265
In Universe Designer, change the object definition to associate a standard List of Values for all objects in the Car class. Save the universe.
266
Quiz: Using lists of values

1. By default what values are contained in a list of values (LOV)? 2. What are three things that a universe designer should keep in mind when deciding whether to associate an LOV with an object? 3. For what types of objects is it recommended not to provide an LOV?
267
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Create a list of values Work with LOVs in Universe Designer Create a cascading LOV
268
Lesson 12
Creating Derived Tables and Indexes

Lesson introduction
A derived table is a dynamic, virtual table that you create within the universe structure. It allows you to transfer more of the processing load from the report server to the database and improve query execution performance. Index awareness is the ability to take advantage of the database indexes on key columns to speed data retrieval. The objects that you create in the universe are based on database columns that are meaningful to an end user. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Use derived tables Apply index awareness
Creating Derived Tables and IndexesLearners Guide
269
Using derived tables

This unit explains derived tables and how you create them as dynamic, virtual tables in the universe. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand the advantage of adding derived tables to your universe structure Insert a derived table in the universe
What is a derived table?

A derived table is a dynamic, virtual table that you create within the universe structure. It consists of a set of SQL statements that you create in Universe Designer, and that you can then use as a logical table to create objects. In the derived tables SQL set, you can put a SELECT statement in place of a table name in the FROM clause. The SQL set can also contain embedded prompts, and you can create joins between the virtual derived table and the physical tables, just as you can with other tables. Derived tables are similar to views in the database, but as they are defined in the universe, they give universe designers more flexibility. You can see a derived table as a query that can be referenced as a table. The table definition SQL is inserted into an end-user query at run time. Note: As it is a query and not a physical table, it is important to understand that the same performance issues that can affect queries can also affect derived tables. Derived tables can be used to merge data together from different tables, when universe designers are unable to conform the underlying data source, and want to normalize or denormalize the universe schema.
Adding derived tables

Derived tables appear in your Universe Designer schema in exactly the same way as normal database tables, but the workflow for creating them is different.
To create a derived table

1. Select Insert Derived Tables. The Derived Tables dialog box displays. 2. Type the table name in the Table Name dialog box. 3. Build the table SQL in the box beneath the Table Name box. You can type the SQL directly or use the Tables and Columns, Operators and Functions boxes to build it.
270
Note: When using an aggregation function, or any other SQL function in the SQL syntax, it is important to alias the column that contains the calculation. Universe Designer uses these aliases as the column names in the derived table. 4. Click Check Syntax to parse and validate your SQL. 5. Click OK. The derived table appears in the schema, below the original physical database table, at the bottom left corner. Tip: Use View List Mode to locate your derived table. 6. Join the table to a table in the existing schema. If contexts have been applied to the schema, make sure the newly inserted join is included in at least one context. 7. Build objects based on the derived table columns in exactly the same way you do with regular tables. 8. Save the universe.
To edit a derived table

1. Right-click the table in the Universe Designer schema and select Edit Derived Table from the shortcut menu. 2. Edit the derived table, and then click OK. 3. Save the universe.
Derived tables as lookup for multiple contexts

Derived tables can be useful to combine data from two separate fact tables. If fact tables are spread across two separate contexts, combining measures from each of these tables results in separate SQL statements. In the Motors schema there is a context for Sales and a context for Rentals. End users may wish to see Clients with both Rental Total and Sales Total data. You can combine the data in a derived table and by basing the Sales and Rental total objects on the new derived table. Users avoid having to select measures from multiple contexts.
271
The derived table will act as a shortcut between the Client and Model table. The SELECT, FROM and WHERE syntax therefore needs to contain the following:
SELECT CLIENT.CLIENT_ID,MODEL.MODEL_ID FROM CLIENT, MODEL,SALE,SALE_MODEL WHERE CLIENT.CLIENT_ID = SALE.CLIENT_ID AND MODEL.MODEL_ID = SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID AND SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID = SALE.SALE_ID
The Rental table is in fact an alias table of the Sale table and cannot be referenced in the derived table. To get the sale and rental values for Sale.Sale_Total, you need to use the Sale.Sale_Type column that indicates which row is sales and which row is rental data. The derived table SQL Syntax becomes:
SELECT CLIENT.CLIENT_ID, MODEL.MODEL_ID, (SELECT CASE SALE.SALE_TYPE WHEN 'R' THEN SALE.SALE_TOTAL ELSE 0 END) AS Rental_Total, (SELECT CASE SALE.SALE_TYPE WHEN 'S' THEN SALE.SALE_TOTAL ELSE 0 END) AS Sales_Total FROM CLIENT, MODEL,SALE,SALE_MODEL WHERE CLIENT.CLIENT_ID = SALE.CLIENT_ID AND MODEL.MODEL_ID = SALE_MODEL.MODEL_ID AND SALE_MODEL.SALE_ID = SALE.SALE_ID
The data for sales and rentals have been combined into a derived table. After joining the table as shown in the diagram and creating a new context, and new objects, users can run a new report in Web Intelligence Rich Client using the Client Name object from the Client table, together with the Sales Total and Rental Total objects from the derived table. The data is returned as one SQL statement and displays in one table.
272
When a query returns a joined SQL statement, the rows where there is no equivalent data are returned as empty cells. These cells cannot be filtered on, as technically, they do not exist. Using the derived table method, the cells where there is no data returns a value of zero. This means that a quick filter in the report panel can be used.
Allowing the user to return the clients that have both rental and sales values in a single SQL statement.
Note: If you use derived tables to create different aggregation levels, be careful to consider the impact on joins, contexts, and many-to-many relationships.
Nested derived tables

The XI 3.0 release of Universe Designer allows designers to build nested derived tables. Sometimes the definition of derived tables can become very complex, and complex derived tables may generate ineffective SQL. The nested derived table feature simply means that you can include an existing derived table in the definition of another new derived table. This makes it easier for designers to define the SQL. The query execution is more efficient because the SQL statements are combined and sent to the database as a single statement.
273
With this feature, designers are able to create a single derived table and use it multiple times in other tables as a nested derived table. The behavior of a nested derived table is exactly the same as a simple derived table. Technically, there is no limit to the number of derived tables that can be nested, but only 20 levels are supported. The nested derived table feature is particularly useful if you want to use a very complex SQL statement more than once in a universe. It allows you to reuse existing definitions. It can also be useful if you want to improve the performance of an existing derived table, for example by using a filter.
Creating nested derived tables

In addition to defining derived tables, the Derived Table Editor in Universe Designer allows you create nested derived tables from existing derived tables. The check integrity function detects impacts on derived tables when a referenced derived table is removed. Check for circular references. Check for @DerivedTable() within object definitions (SELECT and WHERE ), which are not allowed. The new function @DerivedTable(Derived_table_name) is added to the functions catalog to ease building the SQL Definition and is available in the Derived Table Editor. A new function displays the existing derived tables in a new list in order to select derived tables you want to use in the current edited definition. This new list is only displayed when derived tables exist in the universe. The following Derived Table Editor functions work for both derived tables and nested derived tables: The check integrity function detects impacts on derived tables when a referenced derived table is removed. Check for circular references. Check for @DerivedTable() within object definitions (SELECT and WHERE ), which are not allowed.
To create a nested derived table

You create a nested derived table in the same way that you create a derived table. You can add and rename a nested derived table in the same way you add and rename a derived table. 1. Open your universe in Universe Designer. 2. Right-click in the universe Structure pane and select Derived Table in the context menu. The Derived Tables editor opens and the center pane at the bottom of the Derived Tables editor lists the available derived tables. 3. Type the name of your nested derived table. 4. Add the required SQL syntax for the nested derived table using one of the following methods:
274
Type the SQL expression. You can type the entire text or use the editor assistants. Double-click on the objects (tables, derived tables, columns, functions). When clicking on an existing derived table name, the @DerivedTable function is inserted automatically. Use the @DerivedTable function with the syntax: @DerivedTable(Derived_table_name) to choose a derived table.
5. Click Check Syntax to check the syntax of your derived table and correct any potential errors, then validate your nested derived table. The nested derived table is added to the universe. 6. Click OK to validate your nested derived table. The nested derived table appears in the universe Structure pane. Derived tables and nested derived tables are lighter in color than tables that represent actual database tables.
Note: To display the table values, right-click the different tables.
You have created your nested derived table in your universe.
Activity: Adding derived tables

Objectives
Create a derived table that shows the number of transactions per customer. Create a nested derived table.
275
Instructions
1. Using the Motors universe, insert a derived table to show the number of transactions per customer. 2. Name the newly derived table DT_Best_Cust. 3. Create the SQL statement so that it looks like this:
SELECT CLIENT.CLIENT_ID, COUNT(SALE.SALE_ID) AS Number_of_transactions FROM CLIENT, SALE WHERE CLIENT.CLIENT_ID=SALE.CLIENT_ID GROUP BY CLIENT.CLIENT_ID
4. Use Check Syntax to verify your SQL statement syntax. 5. Insert a join between the DT_Best_Cust and CLIENT tables (1:1). 6. Every join (except shortcut joins) must exist in at least one context. Add the new join to the Sales and to the Rentals context. The join between the DT_Best_Cust and CLIENT tables is from the Client_ID primary key in the CLIENT table to the Client_ID foreign key in the DT_Best_Cust table. The table schema looks like this.
7. Add the Number of Transactions object to the Client class. Define the object as a measure object, and ensure the Associate a List of Values option is cleared. 8. Save the universe. 9. In Web Intelligence Rich Client, build a report that shows the number of transactions per customer and the number of transactions per country. 10.In Universe Designer build a nested derived table, called DT_Nested, using the following syntax:
SELECT DT_Best_Cust.CLIENT_ID,CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME, sum(DT_Best_Cust.Number_of_transactions)as Total_Transactions FROM @DerivedTable(DT_Best_Cust),CLIENT WHERE DT_Best_Cust.CLIENT_ID=CLIENT.CLIENT_ID GROUP BY DT_Best_Cust.CLIENT_ID,CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME
11.Join the DT_Nested to the DT_Best_Cust table (1:1). Tip: Every join (except shortcut joins) must exist in at least one context.
276
12.Add the Total_Transactions object to the Client class. Define the object as a measure object, and ensure the Associate a List of Values option is cleared. 13.Save the universe. 14.In Web Intelligence Rich Client, build a report that shows the total transactions and sales revenue, per customer and per country.
277
Applying index awareness

This unit describes how to set up a universe in Universe Designer to take advantage of primary and foreign keys that may already exist in the data source. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand index awareness Set up primary key index awareness
What is index awareness?

Index awareness is the ability to take advantage of the indexes on key columns to speed data retrieval. The objects that you create in the universe are based on database columns that are meaningful to an end user. For example, a Customer object retrieves the field that contains the customer name. In this situation the customer table typically has a primary key (for example, an integer) that is not meaningful to the end user, but which is very important for database performance. In Universe Designer you can apply primary and foreign key index awareness: Primary key index awareness: by applying primary key index awareness on an object Universe Designer can substitute the object's column value with the associated index value. The generated query will use the key value instead of the actual column value. Foreign key index awareness: by applying foreign key index awareness on an object Universe Designer can restrict the values returned without the need to join the tables. If you build a query that involves filtering on a value in a dimension table, Universe Designer can apply the filter directly on the fact table by using the dimension table foreign key. This eliminates unnecessary and costly joins to dimension tables. When you set up index awareness in Universe Designer, you tell Universe Designer which database columns are primary and foreign keys. This can have a dramatic effect on query performance in the following ways: Universe Designer can take advantage of the indexes on key columns to speed data retrieval. Universe Designer can generate SQL that filters in the most efficient way. This is particularly important in a star schema database. If you build a query that involves filtering on a value in a dimension table, Universe Designer can apply the filter directly on the fact table by using the dimension table foreign key. This eliminates unnecessary and costly joins to dimension tables. Universe Designer does not ignore duplicates with index awareness. If two customers have the same name, Universe Designer retrieves only one unless it is aware that each customer has a separate primary key.
278
Setting up index awareness

Report designers in your organization want to build a report using the Motors universe that returns the Highest Priced Value retail price by maker, manufactured in the United Kingdom or the United States. To build this report in Web Intelligence Rich Client, you would drag the Maker and Highest Priced Value objects into the Result Objects pane in the Report Panel. Then, drag the Maker Country object into the Query Filters pane and restrict the countries to the United Kingdom and the United States. Without index awareness, Universe Designer generates the following SQL:
SELECT MAKER.MAKER_NAME, max(MODEL.MODEL_PRICE) FROM MAKER, MODEL, COUNTRY COUNTRY_MAKER WHERE (MODEL.MAKER_ID=MAKER.MAKER_ID) AND (MAKER.COUNTRY_ID=COUNTRY_MAKER.COUNTRY_ID) AND COUNTRY_MAKER.COUNTRY_NAME In ( 'United Kingdom','USA' ) GROUP BY MAKER.MAKER_NAME
In this case, Universe Designer has created a join to the Maker Country table in order to restrict the countries retrieved. With index awareness, you can tell Universe Designer that Country_ID is the primary key of the Country_Maker table and that it also appears in the Maker table as a foreign key. Using this information, Universe Designer can restrict the countries without joining to the Country_Maker table. In this case, Universe Designer is able to generate SQL that restricts the countries simply by filtering the values of the Country_ID foreign key. After setting up index awareness for Maker Country, Universe Designer generates the following SQL, where 44 is the United Kingdom Country_ID value and 1 is the USA Country_ID value:
SELECT MAKER.MAKER_NAME, max(MODEL.MODEL_PRICE) FROM MAKER, MODEL WHERE (MODEL.MAKER_ID=MAKER.MAKER_ID) AND MAKER.COUNTRY_ID In ( 44,1 ) GROUP BY MAKER.MAKER_NAME
What happens behind the scenes

When applying index awareness on the Maker Country, by identifying the primary key in the data source, Business Objects is prompted to add an alternative SQL statement in the WHERE clause whenever Maker Country is used as a condition in a query.
279
Instead of using the County_Name field from Country_Maker table, it will now use the Country_ID field from the Country_Maker table. This is determined from the key entries made in the object properties. Index awareness allows universe designers to automatically redirect a WHERE clause condition to another column that is known to provide better performance at query time. The index awareness option can be used to determine which column to choose as an alternative based on database schema knowledge and the RDBMS optimizer. The LOV values that end users select actually tell Business Objects what primary key values to substitute in final query SQL. The Keys tab tells Business Objects which SQL syntax to substitute in the final query SQL.
To set up primary key index awareness

1. There are two ways to set up primary key index awareness: Right-click the object on which you want to set up index awareness and select Object Properties from the shortcut menu. Select the object and click Object Properties on the Edit menu. The Edit Properties Of dialog box displays. 2. Click the Keys tab.
3. Click Insert. A key line is inserted in the list of keys box. 4. To define key awareness for the primary key: Click the drop-down arrow next to Primary Key and select Primary in the Key Type list.
280
Click within the line under Select field, and then click the ... button that appears, to open the SQL editing dialog box. The Edit Select Statement dialog box appears. In the Edit Select Statement dialog box, use the SQL Editor to build the primary key SQL Select clause or type it directly. 5. Select Enable. 6. Click OK. 7. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all columns that make up the primary key.
Using an index awareness WHERE clause

Using a WHERE clause condition in the indexed key index acts as a data restriction. This may be useful if there is a large amount of data returned for a particular object.
To add an index awareness WHERE clause

1. Double-click the object on which you are setting up index awareness and select the Keys tab. 2. Double-click the Where clause field for the added key type. 3. Type in the required Where clause syntax. 4. Click OK to apply the changes.
Activity: Setting up index awareness

Objective
Apply index awareness to improve the performance of SQL generation in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
Instructions
1. Using the Client Country object in Motors, enter the following under Keys:
281
Primary key
COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID
WHERE
COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_ID=CLIENT.COUNTRY_ID
2. Save the universe. 3. Create a query in Web Intelligence Rich Client with Client Country and Client Name. 4. Apply a query filter, and use the Value(s) from list option to restrict the data to a single country, such as the United States. 5. View the SQL. Notice that the WHERE clause no longer uses the COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME=USA statement (or whichever country you specified). It uses CLIENT.COUNTRY_ID =1.
282
Quiz: Derived tables and indexes

1. What part of the SQL expression does Designer use to create column names in the derived table? 2. When you insert a derived table and insert joins, what happens if you do not add the new join to the appropriate context? 3. How do you apply index awareness on a universe object? 4. How can index awareness improve query performance?
283
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Use derived tables Apply index awareness
284
Lesson 13
Linking Universes
Lesson introduction
Using Universe Designer, you can choose to link universes so that they share common components such as parameters, classes, objects, or joins. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand linked universes Create links between universes
Linking UniversesLearners Guide
285
Understanding linked universes

Using BusinessObjects Universe Designer, you can dynamically link the structure of one or more universes. This can reduce development and maintenance time. When you modify a component in the core universe, Universe Designer propagates the change to the same component in all the derived universes. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand what linked universes are and why you would choose to use them Understand the advantages and limitations of using linking
What are linked universes?

Linked universes are universes that share common components such as parameters, classes, objects, or joins. When you link two universes, one universe has the role of a source or core universe, the other a derived universe. When changes are made in the core universe, they are automatically propagated to the derived universes. The linked objects can only be used to infer SQL against the database that the universe is connected to. For example, within a universe (B) it is possible to dynamically link to another universe (A), as shown in the diagram.
This has the effect of making it appear as though the classes, objects, and structure of universe A are part of universe B. However, they are just a lookup (signified by the fact that they are grayed out) to universe A and cannot be edited in universe B. Because the linked objects infer SQL against the same database defined in the connection for the derived universe, it is not possible to use this functionality to make a universe query more than one database.
Using linked universes

Linked universes enable you to create a set of objects and structure in a single .unv (known as the core universe) and reuse them in another universe (known as the derived universe). Because
286
the core universe is dynamically linked and not copied into the derived universe, there is only one set of code to maintain for the duplicated objects and structure. If you make a change in the core universe, the changes are automatically reflected in the derived universe.
Possible linking strategies

In practice, there are a number of situations where linking can be useful. You can choose to use linking for any of the following reasons: If you decide on a strategy for creating several different universes to front end the target database for different functions within your organization and certain objects are common to all, this offers a way of creating the objects once only and maintaining one instance of them (core approach).
If you need to create the same universe twice with different universe IDs or connections (master approach).
287
If you need to create a large universe and want to divide the development between several designers. Each designer can work on a separate component and then they can all be linked to a derived universe (multiple core/component approach).
288
Advantages and limitations to linking

The following sections outline the advantages and disadvantages to linking a universe.
Key advantages
The key advantages of linking universes are: Reduced development and maintenance time. The universe objects and structure are created only once, and only one instance of an object needs to be maintained. The derived universe(s) is automatically updated when the linked universe is changed. You can centralize often used components in a core universe, and then include them in all new universes. You do not have to recreate common components each time you create a new universe. Facilitated specialization. Development can be split between database administrators who set up a basic core universe and the more specialized designers who create more functional universes based on their specific field.
Limitations
You can link the active universe to a core universe, only if the following requirements are met: The linked universes must use the same connection and connect to the same data source. In a production environment, the core and derived universes must be in the same repository. The core universe needs to have been exported before the derived universe.
Restrictions
You need to be aware of the following restrictions when linking universes: You can use only one level of linking. You cannot create derived universes from a universe that is itself derived. All classes and objects are unique in both the core universe and the derived universes. If they are not, then naming conflicts will occur and Universe Designer will rename objects from the source universe. The two universe structures must be joined to avoid Cartesian products resulting from end-user queries containing objects from both structures. Only the table schema, classes, and objects of the core universe are available in the derived universe. This means that the contexts have to be detected again in the derived universe. In some instances, this can be an advantage because the structure of the two universes is effectively merged in the derived universe and the old contexts are incomplete. LOVs associated with a core universe are not saved when you export a derived universe with the core universe structures. If there are two tables in the linked universes with a common name, the table being imported is the table that will be used, therefore no aliases will be created. All joins will be placed on the new table, assuming it is coming from the same database.
289
Creating links between universes

There are two methods you can use to link universes. Each are used for different purposes: Linking universes When you link universes, you create a set of objects and structure in a single core universe and you reuse them in a derived universe. Including one universe within another When you include universes, you use linking to copy the contents of the core universe into the derived one, but then you use the Include feature to break the link between the two universes. Strategies for using both these methods are discussed in this unit. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Link universes Include one universe within another Understand the advantages of each method
Linking universes
When you link an active universe to another universe, the active universe becomes the derived universe, and the linked universe becomes the core universe. Components from the core universe are inherited by the derived universe. A core universe has to be exported to the Central Management System (CMS), before you can link it in any derived table. If the core universe has not been exported, it will not appear in the list of available universes in the Universe Parameters Links tab. In order to link universes, the derived universe (the universe for which you want to receive the duplicated objects and structure), has to be open in Universe Designer. Using the Link feature, you select the core universe file. When the link is established the contents of the core universe are added to the open derived universe file.
To create a linked universe

1. Open the universe file that you want to become the derived universe. The universe structure is inserted into the Structure panel. 2. Access the Parameters menu using one of the following methods: Click the Parameters toolbar button. Select File Parameters from the menu bar. 3. Click the Links tab. 4. Click Add Link.
290
The Universe to Link dialog box opens. It will point to the default universe location on:
C:\Documents and Settings\<user_name>\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 12.0\Universes\@<server_name>\
5. Select the universe you want to link. 6. Click Open. The Links tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box appears. 7. Click OK. The two universes are now linked. The tables and joins in the structure and the classes and objects of the linked universe are grayed out, thus indicating that they reside in the source universe and cannot be edited in the derived universe.
8. Set the joins between the two structures to avoid potential Cartesian products. 9. Remove existing contexts. 10.Detect aliases. 11.Detect contexts, and customize them if required. 12.Hide/create new objects as required. 13.If you are using aggregate awareness, be sure to specify whether the objects pointing to the new tables are compatible with existing summary tables.
Including one universe within another

In some cases, it would be better to include the component universes in the final derived universe, rather than link them. Linking would mean that there are several separate universes to maintain, but the Include feature copies the contents of the component universes into the derived one. You can choose to use the Include feature instead of linking when you simply want to copy all the classes, objects and structure from one universe to another. You could do this first by linking from universe B to A and then using Include to sever the link, thus making the classes, objects
291
and structure of the universe A part of universe B. In effect, Include is a way of quickly copying everything in one universe to another.
To include a universe
The procedure for including is the same as for linking except that after selecting the universe to link, and before confirming the selection in the Links tab, you perform these steps instead: 1. In the Links tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box, click the universe name in the middle panel. The Include button becomes active.
2. Click Include. The core universe content is copied into the derived universe as shown.
292
When to link and when to include?

When you include, the link to the core universe is broken and the structure, classes, and objects of the included universe become part of the derived universe. Note that the structure, classes, and objects of the included universe are not grayed out. This indicates that they can be edited.
Advantages of linking
The structure is only created once in a core universe and then reused in derived universes. Classes and objects are only created once in a core universe and then reused in derived universes. Most maintenance only has to be applied to the core universe. Derived universes are automatically updated when the core universe is amended.
Disadvantages of linking
Only applicable for repository-based universes. Contexts have to be redefined in each derived universe. Exported lists of values are not available in each derived universe. The connection parameters have to be similar. For example, it is not possible to use this technique to query more than one database. Only one level of linking is allowed.
Advantages of including
It is a quick way of copying one universe into another/others. Maintaining one universe rather than a number of smaller universes is simpler.
293
Disadvantages of including
It is only applicable for repository-based universes. Contexts have to be redefined in the new universe If the initial universe changes, the universe does not reflect those changes.
Activity: Linking universes

Objective
Link and then include universes
Instructions
Business requirement: Prestige Motors management wants to report on the sales performance of its sales staff and their managers. Use the Motors and Staff universes for this activity. 1. Verify the Staff universe has been exported to the Central Management System. Go to File Import and verify that the Staff universe is available. Note: The Staff universe was created during the BusinessObjects XI 3.0: Universe Design course. If this universe is not available: a. Open the Staff.unv file from the Activity_Resources Lesson 7 Solution Universes 1. Using Aliases to Resolve Loops folder on the resource CD. b. Go to File Parameters and make sure it points to the Motors_conn connection. c. Save and export the Staff universe. 2. Open the Motors universe in Universe Designer. This will be your derived universe. 3. Make room in the upper left corner of the Structure pane in the Motors universe. To do this, click in any white space in the Structure pane, click Select All from the Edit menu, then drag the tables to the right of the pane. 4. Link the structure and objects of the Staff universe in the Motors universe. 5. Place the Staff structure in the top left-hand corner of the Motors universe structure and insert a join between the employee and client tables as follows:
EMPLOYEE.EMP_ID=CLIENT.EMPLOYEE_ID
6. Update the contexts. Remember to make sure that context customization is reapplied, to include, and exclude certain joins in each context. 7. Save the Motors universe and close it. 8. Open the Staff universe and make the following changes to the staff object.
294
Name = Sales Person WHERE = EMPLOYEE.JOB_ID = 3 9. Save the Staff universe, export it and close it. 10.Open the Motors universe and check that the change in the Staff universe is reflected in it. 11.Change the Link to Include. 12.Save the Motors universe.
295
Quiz: Linking universes

1. Which of the following is an advantage of using linked universes? Contexts do not have to be detected in the derived universe. You only have to maintain one instance of an object that is used in the linked universes. The exported LOV files are available in both the core and derived universes. 2. True or False. You can use linking to make a universe query more than one database. 3. True or False. When two universes are linked, if you make a change in the core universe, the changes are automatically reflected in the derived universe. 4. To copy the contents of one universe into another, would it be better to Link or to Include the universes?
296
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Understand linked universes Create links between universes
297
298
Lesson 14
Applying Universe Access Restrictions

Lesson introduction
In this lesson, you will learn how to create restriction sets in order to apply security on universes. In this lesson, you will be able to: Set access restrictions on a universe
Applying Universe Access RestrictionsLearners Guide
299
Setting access restrictions on a universe

One of the most important tasks in managing a universe is applying security in order to restrict the users or groups of users who are authorized to use universe objects or resources. This is done so the data displayed in a report only applies to the person viewing the report. For example, data can be restricted so that each salesperson is only able to view information for their own territory, or unit cost data on a pricing report could be hidden from all staff except the accounting managers group. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe the types of restrictions that can be applied to a universe Describe how restriction sets are managed by Universe Designer Apply a restriction set to a user or group of users Create a new restriction set Set restriction group priority View user and group restrictions
About security and universes

In BusinessObjects, universe security can be managed at these levels: Connection credentials and data source The universe connection determines how users connect to the data source and access the database. Universe designers can secure universes by setting different authentication options in the universe connection that corresponds back to security set at data source level. Central Management Server The BusinessObjects system administrator can authorize or deny access to universes stored in the CMS. The administrator can define which universes users are authorized to access, and depending on the rights defined for a user group, the administrator can also restrict viewing, editing, deleting, and other actions in a universe. Universe As universe designer, you can define restrictions for users who are authorized to use a universe. A group of restrictions that correspond to a user group is called a restriction set. A restriction set can include object access, row access, query and SQL generation controls, and connection controls. This unit describes the types of restriction sets you can define on a universe. You can create, edit, and delete a restriction set at any time once the universe has been exported to the CMS. You can create multiple restrictions depending on the query needs of a target user group. A restriction set is a named group of restrictions that apply to a universe. You can apply a restriction set to a selected group or user account for a universe. When users connect to a universe, the objects, rows, query types, and connection that they use in the universe are determined by their applied restriction.
300
You assign a restriction set to a BusinessObjects user or group. This limits the access to universe objects or resources based on the profile of the user group.
What kind of restrictions can be applied to a universe?

Access restrictions that apply to a user or group are defined in a restriction set. You can define multiple restrictions for a universe. Restrictions can be edited, or deleted at any time. The following types of restrictions can be included in a restriction set:
Type of restriction Description
Connection
The universe connection to the data source. You can select an alternative connection for the universe. Options to limit the size of the result set and query execution time. Options to control the SQL generated for queries. You can apply column-level security. You can define a WHERE clause that restricts access to row and limits the result set returned by a query. You can replace a table referenced in the universe by another table in the database.
Query controls
SQL generation options
Object access
Row access
Alternative table access
How are restriction sets managed?

In Universe Designer, you manage restriction sets using the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box, which you access by selecting the Manage Security option on the Tools menu.
301
The Available Restrictions pane in the left-hand side of the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box lists all the restriction sets currently available to the universe. The users and groups defined for each restriction set are listed in the Available Groups and Users pane, in the right-hand side of the dialog box. The options available for managing access restrictions on this universe are described in the table below:
Restriction option Description
New Edit Remove restriction set
To define a new restriction set. To modify an existing restriction set. To remove a restriction set from the list. To add a user or group from the list of BusinessObjects users and groups defined in the Central Management Server (CMS). To define a WHERE clause that restricts access to row and limits the result set returned by a query. To view all users and groups defined in the CMS.
Add user or group
Priority
Preview
302
Delete
To remove a security option from selected users or groups. To define whether you want to combine row restrictions using the AND or OR logical operator.
Restriction options
You can create, edit, and delete a restriction set at any time once the universe has been exported to the CMS. You can create multiple restrictions depending on the query needs of a target user group.
To create a restriction set

1. From the Tools menu, select Manage security..., and then click Manage Access Restrictions... Note: If you have not yet exported the universe, a message box will appear to indicate that you must export the universe before you can create security restrictions. 2. The Manage Access Restrictions box displays.
3. In the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box, click New.
303
The Edit Restriction Set dialog box displays.
The six tabs in this dialog box allow you to define the type of restriction you want to include in this restriction set. Caution: The Reset button at the lower left corner resets every change made in any tab. It resets all options back to the defaults. 4. In the Restriction Name text box, type the name you want to apply to the restriction. 5. Verify that the Connection tab is selected. If you want this restriction set to specify that certain users use a specific connection to connect to the data source, select the connection from the drop-down list or create a new one as you would normally. 6. Click the Controls tab.
304
The Controls tab display.
In this tab, you can limit the size of the result set and the execution time of queries for a specific group of users. These are the same settings that you have used before in the Universe Parameters dialog box. 7. Click the SQL tab The SQL tab displays.
305
In this tab, you can set controls on the types of queries that end users can formulate for a specific group of users. These are the same settings that you have used before in the Universe Parameters dialog box. 8. If you have completed your restriction set, click OK to save the changes, otherwise navigate the remaining tabs to apply further restrictions. Note: Changes made in any of the first three tabs, display in red. This helps designers identify and track any changes made by other designers. Caution: The Reset button at the lower left corner resets every change made in any tab. It resets all options back to the defaults.
To restrict access to specific universe objects

1. In the Edit Restriction dialog box, click the Objects tab. The Objects tab displays.
In this tab, you can specify the objects in this universe that a specific user or group of users will not be authorized to use in queries. 2. In the Objects tab of the Edit Restriction dialog box, click Add.
306
The New Restricted Objects dialog box displays.
Note: If you are sure of the name of the object you want to restrict, you can type it in the Object Name text box and click OK to continue. Otherwise, continue to step 3. 3. Click Select. The Object Browser displays.
In the Object Browser, you can select the universe objects that you want to restrict for a specific user or group of users. 4. Click the + box next to a class folder to view its contents. The class folder opens, displaying the subfolders organized in this class. You can choose to select the objects in these classes one by one, or you can select an entire class or subclass. All the objects in the selected class will be selected at once. 5. Select the object that you want to restrict and click OK.
307
The name of the subclass and object you selected appears in the New Restricted Object dialog box.
6. Click OK. The Objects tab of the Edit Restriction dialog box now displays the object you selected in the list.
7. Click the Add button to continue selecting objects to restrict. 8. After all restrictions have been selected, click the Check All button to validate the object restriction settings. 9. The status of the objects selected appears as OK.
308
10.If you have completed your restriction set, click OK to save the changes, otherwise navigate the remaining tabs to apply further restrictions.
To restrict access to rows in the database

1. In the Edit Restriction dialog box, click the Rows tab. The Rows tab displays.
309
In the Rows tab, you can define a WHERE clause on a table in the database in order to restrict access to specific rows, and limit the results that can be returned by queries run by specific users or a group of users. In this scenario, you want to restrict your sales representatives from querying data concerning sales in 2006. 2. Click the Add button to create a rows restriction. The New Row Restriction dialog box displays.
If you are sure of the table name and the WHERE clause statement, you can type them directly in the text boxes. Otherwise, continue to step 3. 3. Click the >> button to the right of the Table text box. The Table Browser displays, listing all the database tables referenced in this universe.
4. Scroll down the list and click the appropriate table.
310
5. Click OK. 6. In the New Row Restriction dialog box, click the >> button to the right of the Where Clause text box. The Where Clause Definition dialog box displays.
7. Type the appropriate WHERE clause in the text box (or build the SELECT statement using the Tables, Columns, Operators and Functions available) to restrict the data. 8. Click OK to close the Where Clause Definition dialog box. The table and WHERE clause appear in the New Row Restriction dialog box:
9. Click OK to close the New Row Restriction dialog box.
311
10.In the Rows tab of the Edit Restriction dialog box, click the Check All button to validate the restriction definition. The status of the table and WHERE clause you created appears as OK.
11.If you have completed your restriction set, click OK to save the changes, otherwise navigate the remaining tabs to apply further restrictions. Note: Plan and test your row restrictions very carefully. Row restrictions are only applied if the table is actually invoked in the SQL statement generated by the Universe. With Aggregate Awareness, for example, the resultant SELECT clause of an object might not include the table with the restricted column.
To map one table to another

1. In the Edit Restriction dialog box, click the Table Mapping tab.
312
The Table Mapping tab displays.
In this tab, you can define the replacement of a table referenced by an object in the universe by another table for a specific user or group of users. 2. Click Add in the Table Mapping tab. 3. The New Table Mapping dialog box appears. If you know the exact names of the tables, you can type them in the text boxes. Otherwise, use the Select button to select the original and replacement tables. When you have selected the tables, click the Check All button to validate the status of the mapping settings. 4. If you have completed your restriction set, click OK to save the changes, otherwise navigate the remaining tabs to apply further restrictions.
Completing your restriction set settings

When you have finished defining the restrictions for the new restriction set, click the OK button in the Edit Restriction dialog box. The Manage Access Restrictions dialog box appears and the restriction set you just created, My Restriction, appears in the list.
313
In XI V3.0, restrictions are applied by assigning a restriction set to selected users or groups. This assignment is made in the Universe Designer, while the users and groups are created in the Central Management Console.
To apply a restriction set to users or a group of users

1. In the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box, click the Add user or group button located just below the Available groups and users zone. The Select Users and Groups dialog box displays.
314
This dialog box allows you to select the user names and groups to whom you are going to apply the restriction. You can search for names and groups using the search functions shown in the bottom left-hand corner of the dialog box. 2. Scroll down in the Available groups and users list until you see the group you want to restrict. Note: Users are identified in this list with an icon representing a single individual head; groups of users are identified with two individual heads. 3. Double-click the appropriate group or click it and use the >> button to move the group into the Selected users and groups list. 4. Click OK to confirm and close the Select Users and Groups dialog box. The group appears in the Available groups and users list, in the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box.
Note: This list shows that no restriction has been assigned to this group yet. You will now assign a restriction to the selected user group. 5. In the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box, make sure that both the appropriate user set and user group are selected. 6. Click the >>Apply button.
315
The restriction set now appears in the list next to the name of the user group.
Note: The default priority set for the restriction is '1'. 7. Click OK to close the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box.
Setting restriction group priority

You can specify which restriction set to apply to a user that belongs to multiple groups, using a universe. For example a user belongs to two groups, Sales with a restriction to view 5000 rows of data, and Marketing to view 10000 rows. When the user refreshes a report, the restriction associated with the highest level group being applied. In the example above, if the Sales group had order 1 and Marketing had order 2, the restriction from marketing (10000) would be used. You can arrange user groups in order. The restriction for the highest group in the listed order is used.
Note: This only applies to exclusive restrictions such as connection, table mapping, or SQL controls. If object restrictions are set on both groups, they will ALL be applied.
To set user group priority for multiple restriction use

1. In the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box, click a user or group in the Available Groups and Users pane. 2. Click the Priority button.
316
The Set Group Priority box displays.
3. Select a user or group, and click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the priority level. 4. Click OK.
Viewing user and group restrictions

You can view the restrictions applied to all user and groups. In the Manage Access Restrictions menu, or directly from the Manage security menu, you can select the preview option to view all applied restrictions. The Restriction Preview dialog box displays the settings you defined when you created the restriction set. In this example, the dialog box includes two tabs, Objects and Rows, which each correspond to the tabs in the Edit Restriction dialog box you used to define the restriction settings.
317
When selecting the Preview Net Access Restrictions option from the Tools menu, you can view the net result of combining all security restrictions for a user or a group, and all parent groups.
To preview restrictions for a user or group

1. In the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box, click a user or group in the Available Groups and Users pane. 2. Click the Preview button. The Restriction Preview dialog box displays. 3. Click each tab to view the settings that you defined. 4. Click Close. 5. Click OK to close the Manage Access Restrictions dialog box.
To view restrictions for all universe users and groups

1. From the Tools menu in Universe Designer, click Manage security... Preview Net Access Restrictions. The Preview Net Access Restrictions for users and groups dialog box displays. 2. Scroll down the list of groups and users and click the group or user whose restrictions you want to view. 3. Click the Preview button.
318
The same Restriction Preview dialog box displays, allowing you to view the restrictions for the selected group.
Activity: Setting access restrictions

Objectives
Create a new restriction set Apply the restriction set to a user group Test the restriction set in Web Intelligence Rich Client
Instructions
1. In the Motors universe, create a restriction set called Managers_Only, that restricts access to the Manager object. 2. Apply this restriction set to the Sales and Employees group. 3. Preview the restriction to check that it is correct. 4. Save and export the universe. 5. Log onto Web Intelligence Rich Client with the Hank HR user account. 6. Create a new report based on the Motors universe. 7. Verify that the: Employees class is visible Staff object is available Managers object is not visible
319
Quiz: Applying universe access restrictions

1. What are the six types of restrictions that can be included in a restriction set? 2. How would you restrict data to only show Clients from the USA?
320
Lesson summary
In this lesson, you will learn how to create restriction sets in order to apply security on universes. In this lesson, you will be able to: Set access restrictions on a universe
321
322
Lesson 15
Managing Universes
Lesson introduction
This lesson describes how to manage universes. In deploying, managing, and maintaining universes, you ensure that the end users in your organization have access to the universes they need to build reports. After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Document universes Deploy universes Maintain universes Deploy universes in multiple languages
Managing UniversesLearners Guide
323
Documenting universes
As you build a universe that reflects the reporting needs of the end users in your organization, you will probably want to document the progress of the universe design project. You can use the print function in Universe Designer to document the universe as it is being built, as well as to communicate the components of the universe to other universe designers after the project is complete. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Print lists of different universe components Print details concerning each of the universe components
Printing universe details

It is possible to print information about the universe. You can include information about the objects, conditions, hierarchies, tables, joins, and contexts. You can also print the universe schema, showing the full graphical structure of the universe. This feature is useful for documenting the details of the different components that make up the universe. There are several reasons for documenting a universe: As universe designer, you can take snapshots of the universe at various points during its development to chart progress against project plans. You can create a complete breakdown of the universe components on paper, or in PDF format, for archiving after the design work is finished. Other universe designers can use this documentation to quickly familiarize themselves with the major components of a universe.
To select what to print

1. Select Options on the Tools menu. 2. Click the Print/PDF tab. The Print /PDF tab displays in the Tools dialog box. This tab is divided into three sections, listing all the major components of a universe: General section List Components section Full Description section 3. Select or clear the check dialog boxes so that the items you are interested in are printed.
324
Tip: It is recommended that you select all items except Graphical Structure and then print in Portrait mode. Then select only Graphical Structure, scale as required, and, if appropriate, change to Landscape mode. Print again. Note: The Scale setting governs the display of the tables in the Structure pane. To switch between Portrait and Landscape mode, select Page Setup on the File menu. 4. Click OK to accept the settings. The universe structure rarely fits one sheet of paper and often extends across many sheets. To see where page breaks will occur, you can preview the page layout.
To preview where page breaks will be inserted

1. Right-click anywhere in the background of the Structure window. 2. From the shortcut menu, select Page Breaks. Horizontal and vertical red lines indicate where page breaks will occur when the Structure is printed. Note: The lines will alter in accordance with scale and print format.
To print the universe

1. Select Print from the File menu. 2. Select the printer and define the print properties as usual.
325
3. Click OK to print the universe structure.
Printing options: General

The options in the left-hand side of the Print/PDF tab (Options dialog box) allow you to print overall statistics and general information about the universe you are viewing.
Parameters Prints information and statistics about the universe parameters. Prints the name of any universe to which the active universe is linked. Prints the universe schema. Sets the scale for printing the contents of the Structure window. The scale is expressed as a percentage. By default it is 100%. Other scale values in the Scale List Box are 80%, 65% and 50%.
Linked Universes Graphical Structure
Scale
Printing options: List Components

In the middle section of the Print/PDF tab, you can select the universe components that you want to print. The names of each component are printed as a list. For example, if you choose to print a list of the contexts in this universe, the result appears like this: For example, if you choose to print a list of the contexts in this universe, the result appears like this:
Printing options: Full Description

In the right-hand section of the Print/PDF tab, you can choose to print full details concerning the different universe components. If you select the Contexts option in both the List Components section and the Full Description section, the details of each context are printed after the list.
326
327
Deploying universes
After you have completed the universe, have a small team of experts test it rigorously before distributing it to the end-user population. It is recommended that the universe is tested by a small group of other designers and expert users independently to ensure that the universe functions correctly and provides the reports required with accurate results. When you have completed the design, build, and test phases in creating a new universe, you are ready to make the universe available to end users or other report designers. This is known as deploying the universe. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand how universes are deployed to other users Understand how universes are secured Export a universe to the repository Import a universe from the repository Understand how version control is managed
About deploying a universe

Deploying a universe is the action of making the universe available to users or other report designers. You deploy a universe by exporting it to the repository. Only deploy a universe to end users after having completed the design, build, and test phases.
How other users access the universe

To distribute a universe to other users, either for test purposes with other Universe Designer users, or for deployment to the end-user population, you export the universe to the repository and the Central Management Server (CMS). When you export the universe, other Universe Designer users can use the Import command in Universe Designer to open it. Team members can only import the universe if it has previously been exported to the repository where it is stored in the CMS. To test the universe by building reports with it, an expert user selects the universe from the list that is available to that user.
What happens when you export a universe?

To deploy the universe for other users, you need to export it. You can only export a universe that is defined with a secured connection. If the universe has been locked in the repository by another designer, you cannot export it. When you export a universe, three events occur:
328
On your local machine, the universe .unv file is transferred to the following location (or if it is already located there, the .unv is updated with the new version):
\\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\ Business Objects\BusinessObjects 12\universes\@<repository name>\ universe folder\<universe>.unv where @<repository name> is the name of the repository the universe is being exported to.
The universe is also stored in the file system of the Input File Repository Server (FRS), as a .unw file. This is an object that contains both metadata information for the universe and the link to the corresponding universe version stored on the repository file system. A new InfoObject is created in the Central Management Server (CMS). This object can be managed through the Central Management Control (CMC). From the Universe page in the CMC, a BusinessObjects administrator can change the universe name and description, move its location, and define user access rights for the universe. Each time the universe is exported to the CMS, the universe version in the FRS is updated. This is the version that is available to BusinessObjects end users. Note: Saving a universe is not the same as exporting a universe. Saving updates the universe on your local file system, but it does not save the CMS repository version of the universe.
Universes in the local file system

As you work on creating or updating a universe, you work on your own local file system on the machine where Universe Designer is installed. When you save your universe, you can save it in any folder you want. However, after you export the universe to the repository, the universe is transferred to the default location in your Documents and Settings. In this example, the user "Designer1" has rights to the repository named @boetraining_6400. All universe folders for "Designer1" are under that subfolder in that users local file system.
LOV files are stored in a folder with the same name as the universe file at the same level as the universe.
329
The universe is also stored on the CMS, so that other designers can import it, and users can use it to create reports. When you import a universe from the CMS, the .unw file stored in the FRS file system. Then the CMS InfoObject is converted to a .unv file and transferred to the local machine in the same folder shown above.
How universes are secured

There are several security methods available to ensure that only authorized users are allowed to access the universe, either to update the universe itself or to actually build reports using the universe and a Business Objects end-user querying tool. From Universe Designer, you can apply a password to the .unv file itself. In the BusinessObjects Central Management Console (CMC), the administrator can give users the right to: Import the universe files as universe designers. Create reports using the universe as end users. Note: As a universe designer, you can also apply a restriction set to a selected group or user account for a universe.
To set password protection on the .unv file

1. Select Options from the Tools menu. Click the Save tab:
330
2. Click the Protection Password dialog box and type a password. Users who access the universe using this password now have read-only access. 3. Click the Write Reservation Password dialog box and type a password. Users who access the universe using this password have read and write access. This is only appropriate for users who have access to Universe Designer. 4. Click OK. To deploy the universe so that other users can test it or use it to build Web Intelligence reports, you export the universe to the repository.
To export a universe to the repository

1. Select Export on the File menu. The Export Universe dialog box appears.
2. Select a folder from the drop-down list dialog box where you want to export the universe, or click the Browse button and select a folder in the folder browser. 3. Click a group in the Groups list dialog box. This is the user group that will be allowed to use the exported universe to create reports. The groups proposed in the list dialog box are the groups in which the universe designer is a member. 4. Click a universe in the Universes list dialog box.
331
The Universes list dialog box shows the names of the active universes. 5. If you want to export other universes that are not open, click the Add Universe button, and then use the browser to select the other universes. Note: The universes that are added would need to have a valid secured connection before being able to export them. 6. Click OK. The universe is exported and the updated version in your local file system is synchronized with an updated version of the universe in the CMS.
Importing a universe
As a Universe Designer user, you can import one or more universes stored in the CMS repository. When you import a universe, the CMS checks the universe version on the repository file system. If the version is identical, the universe is made available to you if you are defined as a Universe Designer user in the CMC and you have the right to access this universe. If the universe version on the local file system is more recent than the CMS version, a message dialog box appears asking if you want to replace the universe in the folder. If you answer Yes, then the universe on the local file system is replaced by the version in the CMS. When you import a universe from the CMS, the .unw file store in the FRS file system and the Info Object from the CMS are then converted to a .unv file and transferred to the local machine in the following location:
\\Documents and Settings\<username>\Application Data\ Business Objects\BusinessObjects 12.0\universes\@<repository name>\ universe folder\<universe>.unv
where @<repository name> is the name of the repository the universe is being imported from. You can only import a universe that has already been exported to the repository.
To import a universe from the repository

1. Select Import from the File menu. The Import Universe dialog box displays.
332
2. Select a universe folder from the drop-down list dialog box, or click the Browse button to select a universe using the folder browser. This is the folder where the universes are exported to. 3. Click a universe name. This is the universe that you want to import. 4. Verify the file path for the import folder in the Import Folder field. This is the folder to which the universe will be copied. 5. Click OK.
Working with multiple designers

You can use Universe Designer in a multiple-user environment in which several designers can work on the same universes without causing conflicts between versions. Each time you export a universe to the repository, Universe Designer increments the revision number of the universe. By looking at the universe files revision number, you can determine the latest version of the universe. When you export the universe, the repository version will always be updated, even if there are no real changes.
333
If you try to export a new universe with the same name as an existing universe, Universe Designer displays a message asking you if you want to overwrite the existing universe. You can also lock a universe so that only one designer at a time can make modifications on the universe. After a universe has been exported to the repository, it can be shared by several designers provided that they have the necessary user rights. Only one designer can work on a given universe at a time. A designer who wants to work on a universe can do so only if the universe has not been locked by another designer.
To view the universe revision number

1. In Universe Designer, select Universe Parameters from the File menu. 2. Click the Summary tab. The Summary tab displays. The Revision number appears in the header section at the top of the tab:
To lock or unlock a universe

1. Select Import or Export on the File menu, depending on whether you are importing a universe from the repository or exporting it to the repository. The Import Universe or Export Universe dialog box displays. 2. Double-click the universe file name in the list dialog box to lock the universe before importing or exporting.
334
A padlock icon appears beside the universe file name to indicate that the universe has been locked.
3. To unlock a universe, double-click the file name again.
335
Maintaining universes
After you have completed the universe and then deployed it to the end-user population in your organization for report creation, you must maintain the universe to ensure that it continues to function correctly and provide the reports with accurate results. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Understand the importance of universe maintenance Understand how changes to the target database can impact a universe List which changes have minimal effect on existing end-user reports and which changes can have greater impact
Reasons for universe maintenance

There are three reasons that you may need to distribute a new version of a universe to end users. These are: Changes in the structure of the target database to which the universe is connected Change requests from end users Changes made by the universe designer to expand the universe or enhance the efficiency of the inferred SQL When introducing a new version of a universe make your primary concern its effect on existing end-user reports that are refreshed regularly (as opposed to one-off reports). Conduct testing as rigorously as if you were distributing a completely new universe. Treat distributing new versions of a universe as you would any software update. Distribute new versions in a controlled and regulated fashion.
Changes to the target database

Changes to the underlying database will impact end-user reports to varying degrees, according to the type of changes that have been made.
Minimal Impact Greater impact
Adding new columns Adding new tables
Renaming/moving database Changing existing column and table names Deleting tables and columns
The implications of these changes are: Additions to the target database
336
Adding new tables or columns to the database does not impact the reports that are already created and refreshed regularly by end users. However, you might want to extend the universe to cover the data in these tables. Renaming or moving a database To resolve this situation, you must edit the middleware driver. Changing the existing table and column names of the target database This type of change to a database requires some work by the universe designer, but the situation is retrievable without the user noticing any difference when they refresh existing reports. In the case of a table name change, you must reinsert the table in the structure of the universe as if you were adding a new table, and then edit all the objects that referred to the original table. In the case of a column name change, you only need to edit all the objects that referred to the original column. In both instances, the Refresh Structure and View Associated Objects functions are useful. The procedure for invoking these functions is set out below. Dont forget the Check Integrity function. This is extremely useful in determining errors. Deleting existing tables or columns from the target database This type of change to a database causes problems which are far more difficult for the universe designer to resolve. More importantly, the situation is unlikely to be retrievable without the user noticing any difference. Any report that contains an object that refers to the deleted table or column produces an error when refreshed. Where a column is deleted, you must remove all objects that relate to that column or alter them so that they do not refer to it. Where a table or a join column is deleted, you must also edit the structure. Again, in both instances, the Refresh Structure, View Associated Objects functions, and Integrity Check are useful.
Detecting changes to the universe

Whenever changes to the database are made, such as columns or tables being deleted, you need to assess the impact this has had on the universe. Changes to the underlying target database can require you to modify the universe objects as well.
To assess the impact of changes on the universe

1. In Universe Designer, open you universe file. 2. Select View Refresh Structure.
337
Universe Designer updates the Structure window, based on the changes made to the database. The affected tables are highlighted. Various messages can be displayed, depending on the changes that have been made. 3. Update the universe as necessary to reflect the changes in the database structure.
To detect which objects have been affected by the changes

1. In Universe Designer, open you universe file. 2. Right-click the table header in the Structure of the universe window and click View associated objects on the shortcut menu. Objects that are affected by changes to the table are highlighted in the Objects and Classes window. 3. Check the properties of each object and, if required, redefine them to reflect the changes to the table. Note: If a table is deleted from the database, then it is no longer possible to use this process to view the objects that are affected by the change. If possible, plan the change and view the associated objects for a table before you delete it. Alternatively, select Check Integrity on the Tools menu to identify the errors caused by the changes to the structure.
Adding new tables to an existing universe

If new tables or views are added to the underlying database, you may want to add them to the universe as well. As soon as new tables or views are added, they appear in the Table Browser and, you can add them to the universe structure. It is important that you follow the workflow illustrated below when you insert new tables in an existing universe. As an alternative to deleting and re-detecting contexts, you may want to edit the existing ones.
Adding new columns

If new columns have been added to tables in the database, Universe Designer adds them automatically to the tables in the Structure window when you refresh the structure.
The effect of changing objects

If the underlying database changes, the implications of the changes that you have to make on objects in the universe and the impact of these changes on existing reports vary:
338
Minimal Impact
Greater impact
Redefining an objects SQL Renaming an object
Deleting an existing object Changing existing column and table names Deleting and then recreating an object with the exact same definition
Copying an object to a different class
Moving in the same class or to a different class Adding new objects When you change an objects properties, there is little impact on the end user. For example, if you: Redefine object SQL, there is no noticeable effect on the end user. When a user refreshes or makes a query, the universe is re-imported automatically if the system detects a difference in the flags for the .unv file in the repository. As this is done in the background, it is a very fast process and as a consequence, the users will not realize that this is occurring. Rename an object, this does not affect the data in existing reports when refreshed. The only difference end users might notice is that the column header in a tabular report changes as this is based on the object name. This does not affect the refreshing of a report because the object is identified by an object ID number and not its name. Move an object from one class to another, it does not cause any problems with the refreshing of existing reports. However, remember that it can have a bearing on default hierarchies. Copy and add objects, changing an objectss properties has no bearing on existing reports because they are new to the universe and therefore could not be part of any existing report. The only change you can make to the objects of a universe that has a major effect on existing reports is to delete an object. When the report is refreshed an error will occur.
339
Deploying universes in multiple languages

One of the key features of BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.0 is the ability to produce multilingual metadata and reports from the same universe. This feature enables the user to have a one-step multilingual reporting solution that is locale sensitive, supported by a single metadata universe model and provides full Unicode support. Reports then can be built once from the same universe and run and generated in several languages based on user preferences. The Universe Designer user interface can also be displayed in different languages. This unit describes the multilingual universe features. After completing this unit, you will be able to: Use Translation Manager
Translation Manager
Translation Manager is a new product delivered in the BusinessObjects XI 3.0 release that allows Web Intelligence report designers and consumers to build queries and to display content and text strings in Web Intelligence documents using their preferred language. This product is most useful in the context of worldwide BusinessObjects deployments. Instead of having to duplicate universes and documents for each required language, the customer can use Translation Manager to translate the metadata only once. The translated strings are stored in the universe and in the resulting documents. This means customers can make significant savings in development time and maintenance. Translation Manager allows customers or their translation service providers to translate the metadata stored in a Business Objects universe. The translated character strings are then stored in the universe file. When a report designer creates a Web Intelligence document and retrieves data using this universe, all translatable content is stored in several different languages in the single Web Intelligence document. The language chosen to display the document in the end user's web browser is dependent on the language defined in the user's preferred viewing locale setting in InfoView (My Preferences General Preferred Viewing Locale ) or in the Internationalization settings in Web Intelligence Rich Client (Tools Options Locale). If the user's Preferred Viewing Locale or Internationalization settings are set to a language that does not exist in the Web Intelligence document, then the data is displayed using the default language instead. This default language value is defined when the universe data is translated
Note: Translation Manager does not allow you to translate the data retrieved by the query. This is dependent on the database. A multilingual database is required to display the report data in multiple languages.
Translation Manager is an application that allows customers to: Store in a single document all translatable content in several different languages. Enable end users to display content and strings in Web Intelligence documents according to their preferred language.
340
Translation Manager allows you to translate the following text strings: Class and object names Class and object descriptions Prompted query filter text Context names
To translate a universe with Translation Manager

1. Launch the Translation Manager via Start Programs BusinessObjects XI 3.0 BusinessObjects Enterprise Translation Manager. 2. Log onto the Translation Manager using the same user name and password that you use for other Enterprise applications, then click OK. 3. To translate the universe metadata, you first must import the universe from the BusinessObjects Enterprise Central Management Server (CMS). Click File Import from CMS. 4. Click the Universe Folders folder. Click the universe that you want to translate from the list. 5. Click Add to add the universe to the list of selected universes. 6. Click Import. The universe is imported from the CMS and opens in the Translation Manager window. 7. Before beginning to translate you must first define the source language. Select the relevant source language of the universe and click OK. 8. Now you are going to specify the target language for this translation. To do this, you select the appropriate language from the Available Languages list, and click Add. The chosen language now appears in the Selected Language list. Also, a new column appears in the Category View tab, where you can translate the strings into the chosen language. 9. Expand the Classes folder to view available universe classes. Expand a class to see the objects organized in the expanded class. 10.To translate a class name, expand the appropriate class. In the Name column for the translation language add the appropriate translation string.
341
11.To translate an object name, expand the appropriate object. In the Name column for the translation language add the appropriate translation string.
12.In the Properties zone, you can view and edit the status of the translated terms. These values allow you to track the translation process and flag different terms as validated or not. Select the appropriate status for each edited field.
342
13.Before you can use the translated universe to build a query in Web Intelligence or Web Intelligence Rich Client, the translated universe needs to be exported to the CMS. Indicate that the selected translation is ready to be exported to the CMS by setting the value to Yes. Click in the Ready to export to CMS column for the translation language value to activate the drop-down list. Click Yes.
If not all values in the universe have been translated a message box appears asking if the universe is ready to be exported. Click OK to confirm. Note: The Ready to export to CMS value for each translated language must be set to "Yes", otherwise the users will not see the translated values. 14. Save the universe changes. Click File Save. 15. Export the universe. Click File Export to CMS. 16.In the Export Universe/Webi Document to CMS dialog box, specify the location in the CMS where the universe is to be exported. Click Export and OK. 17.Close the Translation Manager.
To test a translated universe in Web Intelligence Rich Client

1. Launch Web Intelligence Rich Client via Start Programs BusinessObjects XI 3.0 BusinessObjects Enterprise Web Intelligence Rich Client. 2. Enter your user account details and click Logon. 3. Click Tools Options Locale. 4. In the Internationalization settings zone, click the arrow to activate the Select formatting locale (**) drop-down list.
343
5. Select the appropriate language that matches one of the languages used in the translated universe. Click OK to apply the changes. 6. Select the create a new document based on a data source icon. 7. Select Browse for more data sources. 8. In the Data source selection menu select Universe, and click Next. 9. Select the appropriate universe, and click OK. The universe displays the translated objects according to the language set in the Internationalization settings zone. 10.Build a new query using the translated objects.
Activity: Translating a universe with Translation Manager

Objective
Use Translation Manager to translate classes and objects into French and German.
Instructions
1. Launch Translation Manager. 2. Import the Motors universe and translate the following class and objects into French (France) and German (Germany):
Object/Class Client (class) Client Name Client Country Client Town Sales Revenue French Client Nom de client Pays Ville Chiffre d'affaire German Kunde Name des Kunden Land Stadt Umsatz
344
3. Save the changes and export the universe. 4. Test the results in Web Intelligence Rich Client in both French and German.
345
Quiz: Managing universes

1. Why would you decide to print details about the universe components? 2. True/False The universe files revision number allows you to determine if you are working with the latest version of the file. 3. To ensure that you are the only universe designer that can modify a universe, you can: a. Ask your BusinessObjects administrator to restrict access to that universe. b. Lock the universe when you export it to or import it from the repository. c. Set restrictions on elements in the universe.
346
Lesson summary
After completing this lesson, you are now able to: Document universes Deploy universes Maintain universes Deploy universes in multiple languages
347
348
Appendix A
End-of-Course Challenge
The challenge
A customer has called you in to provide a Proof of Concept using a sample of their data to ensure they are purchasing the correct product. Taking into account the complete product line of BusinessObjects products, you need to identify which tools would be best for the customer, not necessarily just the ones used in this challenge, but you do not need to go into any great detail on additional products. In this workshop you will edit and expand the Motors universe so that: Prestige Motors management and personnel can run reports on number of employees, absences and salaries by country, showroom department, job type, date and employee. Salaries should also be able to be reported on by financial year, quarter, month and date. Designing a universe is not just about using the Universe Designer module. Careful planning needs to take place before you as a designer even think about starting up the Universe Designer module. While working through the challenge, you will need to consider each of the five stages in the Universe Development Cycle process:
Preparation
Examine the database schema, maybe breaking it down into areas which cover particular departments to identify which tables will need to be used to satisfy the HR department's requirements.
Analysis
You require a detailed analysis of the precise information required by the users in each of the departments. There are a number of reports that have been identified. The focus must be on the business language users use to describe the information they require. This can then be used in the universe design.
Implementation phase 1: schema design

The information from the data analysis and user requirements must then be amalgamated to create the conceptual design of the universe, its objects and other components. Special note must be made of any potential issues that might occur based on the design. At this stage, it would be good to have those identified.
Implementation phase 2: building the universe in Universe Designer

The Universe is created using the tools in the Universe Designer module. As each part is created it should be tested using the user module. When the universe is correct from a technical and user point of view it can be distributed to the users.
End-of-Course ChallengeLearners Guide
349
Maintenance
When a universe has been distributed to the users, the designer is responsible for updating and maintaining the universe. This means keeping the universe up-to-date with any changes in user information requirements. Your task is to work in a group and discuss the findings of some initial analysis with the HR department of Prestige Motors. Breakout session where as a group you need to identify the requirements Design the initial schema on paper Present the schema to the rest of the class Create the universe in Universe Designer Test your universe in Web Intelligence Rich Client
Customer scenario
Prestige motors has a total of 260 employees. Of the 260 employees, there are 12 who work within HR, few of whom are required to create the reports, most have viewing rights only. Most of the staff can schedule reports. The management needs to see high-level reports, and not just straightforward tables. Showroom staff may be required to generate reports. Reports to detail the following: 1. Salary comparison. 2. Absence by department. 3. Salary levels versus Absence correlation. 4. Employee listing by manager. 5. List of Absences with Absentee. 6. Hierarchical reporting to be based on time, department, and geographic locations. 7. A summary of the number of employees by grade and total salary amount per showroom for each year. 8. A Salary Cost Report broken down by financial year and country on which you can drill down to showroom from country and quarter and month from year. 9. A list of absences detailing the employee, job title, showroom, date of absence, duration of absence and reason for absence. These should be arranged by the reason for absence. 10.A summary of the salary costs and absences per showroom and per year. 11.Employees by department and when they were hired. 12.Departmental employee list by manager. Sample of objects to provide the above: Employee: 1. Country. 2. Showroom.
350
3. Department. 4. Job Title. 5. Distinct Number of employees. 6. Manager detail object produces a list of line managers only when reported on and lists all managers from that table. 7. Ensure the country object produces a list of countries the showrooms are in. Salary: 1. Salary Description. 2. Financial Year (for Salary and Absence analysis only). 3. Financial Quarter (for Salary and Absence analysis only). 4. Financial Month (for Salary and Absence analysis only). 5. Date of Payment - no LOV, formatted to dd/mm/yyyy. 6. Salary Cost (based on the SALARIES table) - formatted as currency. Absence: 1. Start of Absence - no LOV, formatted to dd/mm/yyyy. 2. Duration of Absence (including weekends). 3. Reason for Absence. 4. Absence days - formatted with no decimal places. Two custom hierarchies are required: one for geographic drilling, the other for time based on a financial year. Items to watch out for: 1. Multipurpose lookup tables. 2. Chasm and fan traps. 3. Additional business requirements.
Activity: Completing the end-of-course challenge - part 1

Objectives
Conduct a breakout session where as a group you need to identify the requirements. Design the schema on paper. Present the schema to the rest of the class.
Instructions
1. Conduct a breakout session where as a group you need to identify the following points: Strategy: Define the scope of the universe. Identify and review the production and development architectures. Assemble project teams and define the initial task plan.
351
Analysis: Identify the ad hoc data access requirements of the user community and record them in the form of candidate classes and objects. Identify security requirements. Schema Design: Map objects to corporate data sources. Resolve any circular paths or loops within the data structures that support the required objects. Plan the architecture for the project. Plan the development environment: Identify resources required to support a development universe area. Identify source for development data. Verify appropriate connectivity and initiate any changes or purchases required and plan their implementation. Plan the production environment: Identify resources required for a production universe. Locate source of production data. Verify connectivity. Initiate any changes or purchases required and plan their implementation. Adopt universe standards: Have appropriate naming conventions for universe names, object definition guidelines, names for simple, complex and aggregate objects, class names, alias tables, and help text. You may want to incorporate the class name in the object's name. This may make object names a little long, but it makes it easier for end users to understand where existing objects in a query come from, especially in reports containing many objects, some of which may have similar names. The object's name should always precede the class name(s). Example: Rental Date - Rental Dates - Rentals. Connectivity and configuration: Ensure the infrastructure is in place to support connectivity between users/developers and the enterprise system, including appropriate middleware to support the communication between clients and servers. Identify planned configuration for client software. Ensure appropriate resources are available. Security and support: Initiate a first look at security requirements - to be refined during subsequent phases. Develop a support policy that will be followed when the universe goes into production. Identify necessary resources. Change management and training: Identify procedures for the request, review, approval and implementation of changes to the production universe. It is essential to educate even existing users on how to use the universe to meet the business needs. Identify the best practices to be followed. Quality Assurance. 2. You need to identify the following for a high-level presentation: Have a schema of the universe prepared on paper. Key points to setting up your deployment: Best practices Strategies to adopt Design workflow to follow Architecture and health checks Potential products to use Schema of the universe based on the Customer scenario Analyze recipients to determine which reporting tool to be used
352
Activity: Completing the end-of-course challenge - part 2

Objectives
Create the universe in Universe Designer. Test your universe in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
Instructions
1. Create a new universe called HR_Motors.unv. 2. Using your paper design as a reference, design the universe schema. Insert tables, joins, and create the appropriate classes and objects. 3. Resolve any potential loops or SQL traps. 4. Check the universe integrity. 5. Test the universe in Web Intelligence Rich Client.
353
354
Appendix B
Understanding Relational and Dimensional Modeling

Understanding the metadata
Before developing a universe you must familiarize yourself with the underlying data. Which type of database schema is going to be used for the universe? Will this be a Data Warehouse model, an Online Transactional Processing system (OLTP), or a Data Mart? How can you best implement the metadata into a universe schema to meet the end-user requirements?
Understanding Relational and Dimensional ModelingLearners Guide
355
Data warehouses
A data warehouse is an enterprise-wide centralized storage facility for different types of data. Data stored in a data warehouse is characteristically subject oriented, time sensitive, and should be organized in a way that allows data analysis. For example, a data warehouse can contain customer information and sales details per customer, over the past five years. These customer details and sales records are often derived from several production systems in the enterprise. Performing query and trend analysis on this dispersed data can prove to be a difficult task. This is where data warehousing comes into play. Data warehousing is the process of collecting, aggregating, storing, and maintaining information so that it may lead to accurate business decisions. Some characteristics and features of data warehousing are as follows: Provides a consolidated storage of information from across the enterprise. Warehoused data is organized by subject area and is populated from many operational systems. Can act as a decision support system. Generally concerned with historical data and aggregates. Added to regularly, but loaded data is rarely ever directly changed. Regular schedule of dumps and loads from operational data stores. All these features differentiate data warehouses from typical operational database systems. Data warehouses are commonly kept on separate machines that can be tuned for a lower frequency of users with different querying characteristics. Data warehouses are usually read-only based systems, aside from the periodic loading of current information.
356
Online Transactional Processing systems

Operational database systems deal with handling many users and transactions. These databases are often referred to as Online Transactional Processing systems (or OLTP). These operational databases are continuously used systems in which users add, update, and query the stored information. An example of an OLTP is a typical order-entry application. A customer calls a call center and orders products from a catalog. The sales representative answering the call can pull up the order entry screen and enter the line items the customer desires. Whenever an order is placed it triggers inventory allocations. This seems like a relatively small process, but it will have generated many records, and many underlying transactions. This type of OLTP system requires transactions to be speedy and inventory levels to be accurate. The sheer volume of these diverse operations and the amount of data that is produced provide a poor environment for decision support. OLTP systems have been designed to support the primary business processes and are optimized for transaction processing. To avoid data redundancy and possible data conflicts the data model has been normalized. An OLTP environment is not necessarily designed for querying and reporting, which can potentially make universe design based on an OLTP more challenging.
357
Data Marts
A data mart is a repository of data gathered from operational data or other sources and is designed to serve a particular department or functional group. It is similar to a Data warehouse, but there would be a difference in size and focus. The emphasis of a data mart is on meeting the specific demands of a particular group of users. These users can run reports and analyze data stored in the data mart that is designed to portray information based on their group requirement needs. A common approach to using data marts is to keep data at a detail level in the data warehouse and summarize this information into the data mart for each functional group or department. Sometimes data marts are designed for each departmental unit, and all departmental data marts are merged later on into an enterprise-level data warehouse. Either method offers the benefit of centralizing the information for the end users. Some characteristics of data marts are as follows: Data specialized for a particular group of an organization. Engineered for easy access. Optimal response from lower volume queries. Due to the more simplified and specialized nature of data marts, organizations are turning to data marts, as a quick solution to their decision-support needs.
358
Dimensional Modeling
The traditional entity relationship (ER) model uses a normalized approach to database design. Normalization removes redundancy from the schema to optimize storage. Data warehousing is not that concerned with saving space. It is more concerned with meeting the decision support needs. A small amount of redundancy is usually acceptable.
Star and snowflake schemas

Dimensional modeling is a more appropriate approach to the warehouse design. With dimensional modeling you separate the business data into logical events or facts and a set of corresponding dimensions. This results in a schema that is commonly referred to as the star schema. This schema normally contains a large and centralized fact table which branches off into many small dimension tables, resembling a star-like layout.
Fact Tables
The fact table that sits in the center of this star schema usually contains business events recorded over time. Examples of data that can be found in this table are: sales transactions, orders and returns, bank transactions, shipments, and so forth. The fact table normally consists of a set of numeric values and a number of foreign keys that correspond to primary keys in the various dimension (lookup) tables. The information stored in the fact tables is usually static as it is historical. The most common example of a fact table in the star schema is for sales.
Dimensions
The dimension tables consist mainly of descriptive information linked to fact records. Examples of dimension data are: customer names, product descriptions, suppliers, and vendors. Dimension tables contain fewer records than the facts table. An important factor is that the information in dimension tables is not static as records in dimension tables can be updated. For example, a customer address might be modified in the source system.
359
A typical data warehouse schema always uses dimension tables or tables that deal with periods of time. These tables are the key element to tracking the time variant information in these types of databases. Sometimes a more normalized approach is taken to the dimension tables. When this happens the star schema changes to a snowflake (or constellation) schema. A snowflake schema is basically one fact table, connected to a number of dimension tables, and these dimension tables in turn are connected to additional dimension tables.
In a snowflake schema it is also common to include aggregations across dimensional hierarchies, for example sales values summed up by store. These sales values can also be summarized into separate fact tables by region or district. The dimensional model is a logical technique optimized for queries and reporting. It is the most common model used in current data warehousing or data mart designs. It provides simplified hierarchical paths that would enable end users with drill-down analysis capabilities. Precalculated aggregations can be also embedded in the fact tables, which can result in rapid query-response times.
360
Appendix C
SQL syntaxes for other RDBMS

Alternative SQL syntaxes for other RDBMS
This appendix provides the alternative SQL syntaxes for Oracle, MySQL, DB2 and Microsoft Access, for the more complex objects used within this course.
ORACLE
This section provides solution syntaxes for ORACLE, based on SQL examples used in the course.
SQL syntaxes for other RDBMSLearners Guide
361
Object Name
Oracle CONCAT(CONCAT( CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME,', '), CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME)
Client Name
Model
CONCAT(CONCAT(CONCAT (CONCAT(MODEL.MODEL_NAME,' '), MODEL.MODEL_TRIM),' '), MODEL.MODEL_ENGINE)
Sale Year
CONCAT('Calendar Year ', TO_CHAR(SALE.SALE_DATE,'YYYY'))
Sale Quarter
CONCAT('Q',TO_CHAR (SALE.SALE_DATE,'Q'))
Sale Month
TO_CHAR (SALE.SALE_DATE,'Month')
Rental Year
CONCAT('Calendar Year ', TO_CHAR(RENTAL.SALE_DATE,'YYYY'))
Rental Quarter
CONCAT('Q',TO_CHAR (RENTAL.SALE_DATE,'Q'))
Rental Month
TO_CHAR (RENTAL.SALE_DATE,'Month')
Sales Revenue 2003
sum(CASE WHEN to_char(SALE.SALE_DATE,'YYYY') ='2003' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
Sales Revenue 2004
sum(CASE WHEN to_char(SALE.SALE_DATE,'YYYY') ='2004' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
Sales Revenue for FY03-04
sum(CASE WHEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY03-04' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100))
362
Object Name
Oracle ELSE 0 END)
sum(CASE WHEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY04-05' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
DB2
This section provides solution syntaxes for DB2, based on SQL examples used in the course.
363
Object Name
DB2 {fn concat({fn concat( CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME,', ')}, CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME)}
Client Name
Model
{fn concat({fn concat( {fn concat({fn concat( MODEL.MODEL_NAME,' ')} ,MODEL.MODEL_TRIM)},' ')}, MODEL.MODEL_ENGINE)}
Sale Year
{fn concat ('Calendar Year ',char(year( SALE.SALE_DATE)))}
Sale Quarter
{fn concat ('Q',char(quarter( SALE.SALE_DATE)))}
Sale Month
MONTH(SALE.SALE_DATE)
Rental Year
{fn concat ('Calendar Year ',char(year( RENTAL.SALE_DATE)))}
Rental Quarter
{fn concat ('Q',char(quarter( RENTAL.SALE_DATE)))}
Rental Month
MONTH(RENTAL.SALE_DATE)
Sales Revenue 2003
sum(CASE WHEN year(SALE.SALE_DATE) = 2003 THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END )
Sales Revenue 2004
sum(CASE WHEN year(SALE.SALE_DATE) = 2004 THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END )
sum(CASE WHEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY03-04' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 -
364
Object Name
DB2 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END )
sum(CASE WHEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY04-05' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE *(100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END )
MySQL
This section provides solution syntaxes for MySQL, based on SQL examples used in the course.
365
Object Name
MySQL {fn concat({fn concat( CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME,', ')}, CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME)}
Client Name
Model
{fn concat({fn concat( {fn concat({fn concat( MODEL.MODEL_NAME,' ')} ,MODEL.MODEL_TRIM)},' ')}, MODEL.MODEL_ENGINE)}
Sale Year
{fn concat('Calendar Year ', YEAR(SALE.SALE_DATE))}
Sale Quarter
{fn concat('Q', QUARTER(SALE.SALE_DATE))}
Sale Month
MONTH(SALE.SALE_DATE)
Rental Year
{fn concat('Calendar Year ', YEAR(RENTAL.SALE_DATE))}
Rental Quarter
{fn concat('Q', QUARTER(RENTAL.SALE_DATE))}
Rental Month
MONTH(RENTAL.SALE_DATE)
Sales Revenue 2003
sum(CASE WHEN {fn year(SALE.SALE_DATE)} = 2003 THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
Sales Revenue 2004
sum(CASE WHEN {fn year(SALE.SALE_DATE)} = 2004 THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
sum(CASE WHEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY03-04' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
366
Object Name
MySQL sum(CASE WHEN FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY04-05' THEN (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100 SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)) ELSE 0 END)
Microsoft Access
This section provides solution syntaxes for Microsoft Access, based on SQL examples used in the course.
367
Object Name Client Name
Microsoft Access CLIENT.CLIENT_LASTNAME +', '+ CLIENT.CLIENT_FIRSTNAME
Model
MODEL.MODEL_NAME +' '+ MODEL.MODEL_TRIM +' '+ MODEL.MODEL_ENGINE
Sale Year
'Calendar Year ' + format(SALE.SALE_DATE,'YYYY')
Sale Quarter
'Q' + format(SALE.SALE_DATE,'Q')
Sale Month
format(SALE.SALE_DATE,'Mmm')
Rental Year
'Calendar Year ' + format(RENTAL.SALE_DATE,'YYYY')
Rental Quarter
'Q' + format(RENTAL.SALE_DATE,'Q')
Rental Month
format(RENTAL.SALE_DATE,'Mmm')
Sales Revenue 2003
sum(IIf{fn year(SALE.SALE_DATE )} = 2003, (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100-SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)),0))
Sales Revenue 2004
sum(IIf{fn year(SALE.SALE_DATE )} = 2004, (SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100-SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)),0))
sum(IIf(FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY03-04',(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100-SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)),0))
sum(IIf(FINANCE_PERIOD.FP_YEAR ='FY04-05',(SALE_MODEL.SALE_QTY * MODEL.MODEL_PRICE * (100-SALE.SALE_DISCOUNT)/100)),0))
368
Answer Key
This section contains the answers to the reviews and/or activities for the applicable lessons.
Answer KeyLearners Guide
369
370
Quiz: Understanding BusinessObjects universes

Page 29
1. What are the two main panes in Universe Designer? Answer: Universe pane, Structure pane 2. What are the three ways to issue commands in Universe Designer? Answer: menu options, toolbar buttons, right-click drop-down menus 3. Where can you define what specific information about the universe gets printed? Answer: Under Tools Options Print/PDF
371
Quiz: Creating the course universe

Page 52
1. Information about universe administration appears on the Universe Parameters dialog box. Under which tab can you find this information? Answer: Summary tab 2. Can a universe and its content be embedded in another universe? Answer: Yes, you can set this up in the Links tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box. Remember that both universes must reference the same database account or targeted data source. 3. If you want to distribute the completed universe to the user population using the BusinessObjects repository, which type of connection should you use? Answer: Use a secured connection.
372
Quiz: Building the universe structure

Page 89
1. A schema contains two elements. What are they? Answer: Tables Joins 2. What are three reasons why using the automatic detection routine for setting join cardinalities is not recommended? Answer: Cardinality is based on logic. The automatic detection routine uses physical cardinality, and runs a physical count on the values in both columns being joined. You may get incorrect results if the physical count does not return the same result as a logical analysis of the data. The algorithm used by the automatic detection routine assumes that you have sufficient quantity of data in both tables to be representative in ratio to the database in a live environment. If you are designing against a test database, for example, with only a representative sampling of data, because the routine runs a physical count, it could give you the incorrect answer. The automatic detection routine runs three subsequent queries at the target database per join, which may take a very long time for large databases. 3. What type of join is created by default between two tables? Answer: The default join type is equi-join.
373
Quiz: Creating dimension objects

Page 116
1. Which of the three types of objects contain aggregate functions that map to statistics in the database? Answer: Measure objects 2. When you are testing objects, what are the three things for which you need to test? Answer: Do the objects exist? If not, you may have forgotten to save your universe since the object you are testing was created. Does the SQL appear correct? Are the results of the query correct? 3. If each object maps to a column or function in a target database, when used in a query, what kind of statement does the object infer? Answer: A SELECT statement
374
Quiz: Creating measure objects

Page 137
1. Measure objects are very flexible because they are semantically dynamic. What does this mean? Answer: This means that the values they return in a query will vary depending on the dimension and detail objects that are used with them. 2. Measure objects are created in the same way as a dimension or detail object. However, the object properties differ in two ways. What are they? Answer: The object properties differ as follows: The Data Type field must be set to Number. The Select field must include an aggregate function.
375
Quiz: Resolving loops in a universe

Page 169
1. What is the first step in resolving loops? Answer: Detecting cardinalities 2. What causes a loop? Answer: A loop is a join path issue that arises from the way that lookup and fact tables are related in a relational database. Loops can produce instances where a query returns too few rows of data. 3. What are the two main methods of resolving loops? Answer: Aliases Contexts 4. What are the three types of queries you can use to test your contexts? Answer: Inferred Incompatible Ambiguous
376
Quiz: Resolving SQL traps

Page 197
1. A chasm trap can occur when: Answer: 1. Two joins from many-to-one-to-many converge on a single table. 2. The query includes objects based on the two many tables. 3. There are multiple rows returned for a single dimension value. 2. Describe two ways to resolve chasm traps. Answer: 1. Create a context for each fact table. This solution works in all cases. 2. Modify the SQL parameters for the universe so you can generate separate SQL queries for each measure. This solution only works for measure objects. It does not generate separate queries for dimension or detail objects. 3. Describe three ways to resolve fan traps. Answer: 1. Alter the SQL parameters for the universe. This only works for measure objects. This resolution works the same for chasm and fan traps. 2. Create an alias for the table containing the initial aggregation, and then use Detect Contexts (Tools > Detect Contexts) to detect and propose a context for the alias table and a context for the original table. This is the most effective way to solve the fan trap problem as it will work with measure and dimension objects. 3. Avoid the fan trap in the first place by using the same level of granularity.
377
Quiz: Applying restrictions on objects

Page 212
1. What is a restriction? Answer: A restriction is a condition in SQL that sets criteria to limit the data returned by a query. 2. Explain two drawbacks of using restrictions at the object level. Answer: You would get a confusing proliferation of objects for end users because you would then need a French Clients object, a German Clients object, and so on. As these objects would all represent alternate restrictions, you would not be able to construct a logical default hierarchy (which end users make use of when drilling down). Although the UK Clients example is fairly clear, in many cases the restriction will not be obvious to the user simply from the name of the object. The details of the WHERE clause are not shown in the User module. If two or more similarly restricted objects are included in the same query, the conflict between the WHERE clauses will cause no data to be returned. 3. When should you use self-restricting joins? Answer: Use self-restricting joins to apply restrictions to tables when you want the restriction to apply irrespective of where the table is used in the SQL. This method is ideal when a table uses a flag to switch between two or more domains.
378
Quiz: Using @functions with objects

Page 230
1. What parameter does the @select require? Answer: @select requires the path of the existing object to be dynamically linked to. 2. True or False. You can use the @where function in a condition object to point to an object, but not the other way around. Answer: True 3. What function is used to create an interactive object that causes a message to appear at query runtime, that asks the user for specific input? Answer: b. @prompt 4. In the @prompt two parameters are mandatory and three are optional. What parameters are optional? Answer: LOV pointer or hard-coded list Mono or Multi Free or Constrained
379
Quiz: Using hierarchies

Page 252
1. A _____________ hierarchy is the hierarchy based on the order of the objects within the class. a) Default b) Custom Answer: a) Default 2. What are two advantages of Automatic Time Hierarchies? Answer: 1. It is a fairly quick and easy way to set up a Time Hierarchy. 2. It automatically creates an SQL Select clause using the appropriate scalar function or the RDBMS of the target database.
380
Quiz: Using lists of values

Page 267
1. By default what values are contained in a list of values (LOV)? Answer: An LOV is a list associated with an object that, by default, contains all the distinct values from the fields in the database for that object. 2. What are three things that a universe designer should keep in mind when deciding whether to associate an LOV with an object? Answer: Because an LOV is based on a SELECT DISTINCT query that is sent to the target database, associating an LOV will have implications for the efficiency of Web Intelligence. The only purpose for creating an LOV is to assist the end user in choosing an operand value for a condition. If the LOV does not do this, there is no point in associating it with the object. Unless the LOV is based on a personal file and not a query, the list will only hold values that exist within the database. 3. For what types of objects is it recommended not to provide an LOV? Answer: It is recommended that you do not provide an LOV for the following types of objects: All measure objects. Any object where the LOV will consist of a large number of values. Any object where the list on its own would be meaningless.
381
Quiz: Derived tables and indexes

Page 283
1. What part of the SQL expression does Designer use to create column names in the derived table? Answer: It uses an alias (in SQL) to create column names. For example: count(Region.Region_ID) as number_of_regions. 2. When you insert a derived table and insert joins, what happens if you do not add the new join to the appropriate context? Answer: When you parse the derived tables SQL, it will generate an exception. When you run a query, the derived table will create a Cartesian product. The objects you create from the derived table will be incompatible with objects from any of the existing contexts. 3. How do you apply index awareness on a universe object? Answer: Go to the Keys tab of the Edit Properties dialog box for the object you want to make index aware. 4. How can index awareness improve query performance? Answer: It can improve query performance by taking advantage of indexes on key columns in the data source.
382
Quiz: Linking universes

Page 296
1. Which of the following is an advantage of using linked universes? Contexts do not have to be detected in the derived universe. You only have to maintain one instance of an object that is used in the linked universes. The exported LOV files are available in both the core and derived universes. Answer: You only have to maintain one instance of an object that is used in the linked universes. 2. True or False. You can use linking to make a universe query more than one database. Answer: False 3. True or False. When two universes are linked, if you make a change in the core universe, the changes are automatically reflected in the derived universe. Answer: True 4. To copy the contents of one universe into another, would it be better to Link or to Include the universes? Answer: Include
383
Quiz: Applying universe access restrictions

Page 320
1. What are the six types of restrictions that can be included in a restriction set? Answer: Connections Query controls SQL generation options Object access Row access Alternative table access 2. How would you restrict data to only show Clients from the USA? Answer: Define a Where Clause in the Rows tab with the Syntax:
Where COUNTRY_REGION.COUNTRY_NAME = 'USA'
384
Quiz: Managing universes

Page 346
1. Why would you decide to print details about the universe components? Answer: To track progress against project plans during universe development and test phases. To archive after the design work is finished. To communicate the components of the universe to other designers. 2. True/False The universe files revision number allows you to determine if you are working with the latest version of the file. Answer: True. 3. To ensure that you are the only universe designer that can modify a universe, you can: Answer: b. Lock the universe when you export it to or import it from the repository.
385
386
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes

Universe

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Universe

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BusinessObjects XI 3.

Learners Guide DM310V3.0

Understanding BusinessObjects Universes

Table of ContentsLearners Guide

Creating the Course Universe

Building the Universe Structure

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Creating Dimension Objects

Table of ContentsLearners Guide

Creating Measure Objects

Resolving Loops in a Universe

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Resolving SQL Traps

Table of ContentsLearners Guide

Applying Restrictions on Objects

Using @functions with Objects

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Using Lists of Values

Creating Derived Tables and Indexes

Table of ContentsLearners Guide

Applying Universe Access Restrictions

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Understanding Relational and Dimensional Modeling

SQL syntaxes for other RDBMS

Table of ContentsLearners Guide

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Understanding BusinessObjects Universes.....................45 minutes

Creating the Course Universe...............................................30 minutes

Building the Universe Structure...........................................45 minutes

Creating Dimension Objects..................................................75 minutes

Creating Measure Objects.........................................................1.5 hours

Resolving Loops in a Universe....................................................3 hours

Resolving SQL Traps.........................................................................1 hour

Applying Restrictions on Objects.................................................1 hour

Using @functions with Objects............................................45 minutes

Using Hierarchies......................................................................45 minutes

Using Lists of Values................................................................30 minutes

Creating Derived Tables and Indexes.................................75 minutes

Linking Universes......................................................................30 minutes

Applying Universe Access Restrictions.....................................1 hour

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Managing Universes.................................................................45 minutes

Universe DesignLearners Guide

About this Course

About this CourseLearners Guide

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Level, delivery, and duration

Applicable certifications and designations

Course success factors

About this CourseLearners Guide

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Understanding BusinessObjects Universes

Understanding BusinessObjects UniversesLearners Guide

Defining BusinessObjects universe concepts

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Universes are used to query the database

The semantic layer

Understanding BusinessObjects UniversesLearners Guide

Universe Designer and the semantic layer

What type of database schema is used?

Universe DesignLearners Guide

Classes and objects

Understanding BusinessObjects UniversesLearners Guide